Yamaha 340 de handleiding

Categorie
Digitale piano's
Type
de handleiding
EN
DIGITAL KEYBOARDDIGITAL KEYBOARD
Owners ManualOwners Manual
2
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING:
Do not place this product in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any
kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an
extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG.
NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-
pany the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long
periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-
able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory
mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as
optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer
assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and
any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE
using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are
not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-
ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-
ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-
tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes neces-
sary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the
replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being
charged.
When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and
never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-
rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-
teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-
son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP (bottom)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-
tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not
expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by
the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/
or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s
supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-
able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-
tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies
and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does
not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If
this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be
determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-
nate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-
tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,
6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
3
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
OBSERVERA!
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den
ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også
selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko
laitetta verkosta.
(standby)
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb
Deutschlands)
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien
oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei
einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben
werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
(battery)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.
90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard
Model Name : PSR-E343/YPT-340
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is
suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be
found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit.
You should note this serial number in the space provided below and
retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid
identification in the event of theft.
Model No.
Serial No.
(bottom_en_01)
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should
not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with
your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human
health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service
or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
(weee_battery_eu_en_01)
4
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals
In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available.
MIDI Reference
Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.
MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do.
Computer-related Operations
Contains instructions about computer-related functions.
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual
Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc.
To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E343” (for example) to the Model
Name box, then click [SEARCH].
Yamaha Downloads
http://download.yamaha.com/
Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)
Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user
registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge.
Yamaha Online Member
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this
manual in order to fill out the User Registration form.
Included Accessories
• Owner’s Manual (this book)
• AC Power Adaptor
*1
• Music Rest
• Online Member Product Registration
*2
*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer.
*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Formats and functions
GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which ensures that any GM-compatible
music data can be accurately played by any GM-
compatible tone generator, regardless of manufac-
turer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and
hardware products that support GM System
Level.
XGlite
As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified ver-
sion of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone genera-
tion format. Naturally, you can play back any XG
song data using an XGlite tone generator. How-
ever, keep in mind that some songs may play back
differently compared to the original data, due to
the reduced set of control parameters and effects.
USB
USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial
Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a
computer with peripheral devices. It allows
“hot swapping” (connecting peripheral
devices while the power to the computer is
on).
STYLE FILE
The Style File Format combines all of
Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how
into a single unified format.
Touch Response
The exceptionally natural Touch Response
feature gives you maximum expressive con-
trol over the level of the Voices.
5
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
About the Manuals................................................ 4
Included Accessories............................................ 4
Formats and functions .......................................... 4
Setting Up
Panel Controls and Terminals 8
Setting Up 10
Power Requirements .......................................... 10
Using the music rest ........................................... 11
Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment
.. 11
Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack .. 11
Turning the Power On/Off................................... 11
Auto Power Off Function .................................... 12
Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 12
Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard 12
Display Items and Basic Operations 13
Display Items ...................................................... 13
Basic Operations ................................................ 13
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14
Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 14
Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 14
Using the Metronome ......................................... 14
Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 15
Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 15
Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound
(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15
Adding Harmony................................................. 16
Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 16
Playing Styles 17
Using the Music Database.................................. 18
Registering a Style File....................................... 18
Style Variations—Sections ................................. 19
Changing the Tempo.......................................... 19
Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 20
Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 21
Playing Songs 22
Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 22
Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 22
BGM Playback.................................................... 23
Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 23
Changing the Melody Voice................................ 23
A-B Repeat......................................................... 24
Turning Each Part On/Off................................... 24
Playing an External Audio Device with the
Built-in Speakers 25
Using the Melody Suppressor .............................25
Using the Song Lesson Feature 26
Downloading the Song Book...............................26
Keys To Success ................................................ 26
Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................28
Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting
.29
Phrase Repeat .................................................... 29
Recording Your Performance 30
Track Structure of a Song ...................................30
Quick Recording..................................................30
Recording to a Specified Track ...........................31
Clearing a User Song.......................................... 31
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 32
Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory
..32
Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory
..32
The Functions 33
Using with a Computer or iPad/iPhone 36
Connecting to a computer ...................................36
Connecting an iPad/iPhone.................................36
Backup and Initialization 36
Backup Parameters.............................................36
Initialization .........................................................36
Appendix
Troubleshooting.............................................37
Song Book Sample ........................................38
Voice List ........................................................48
Drum Kit List ..................................................53
Song List......................................................... 56
Style List .........................................................57
Music Database List ......................................58
Effect Type List ..............................................59
Specifications................................................. 60
Index................................................................ 61
Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!
We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced
and convenient functions of the instrument.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
Contents
6
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also,
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on
it.
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage
is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Use the specified adaptor (page 60) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in
damage to the instrument or overheating.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument
or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)
containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as
water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the
power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall
over and cause a fire.
Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire,
overheating or battery fluid leakage.
- Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.
- Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
- Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged.
- Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins,
coins, and keys.
- Use the specified battery type (page 10) only.
- Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by
the same manufacturer.
- Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity
markings.
- When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long
time, remove the batteries from the instrument.
- When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the
batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging.
Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them.
If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid
should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with
water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss
of sight or chemical burns.
When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch
and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries,
remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by
Yamaha service personnel.
- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.
- It emits unusual smells or smoke.
- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.
- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for
extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage
to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
Battery
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/AC power adaptor
Location
DMI-5 1/2
7
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily
accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power
switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is
turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When
you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power
cord from the wall AC outlet.
Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal
components or result in the instrument falling over.
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,
set all volume levels to minimum.
Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and
gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the
desired listening level.
Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or
keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the
instrument or other property, or operational failure.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.
When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.
NOTICE
To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the
notices below.
Handling and Maintenance
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON”
on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)
to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° –
40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Saving data
Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer. (page 36)
Information
About copyrights
Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal
use.
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use
others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and
sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of
copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
About functions/data bundled with the instrument
Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
About this manual
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your
instrument.
iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Connections
Handling caution
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
DMI-5 2/2
8
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
q [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................... page 11
w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 11
e [DEMO] button......................................page 23
r [FUNCTION] button..............................page 33
t [METRONOME] button.........................page 14
y [TEMPO/TAP] button............................page 19
u PART
[L] button ..............................................page 28
[R] button..............................................page 28
u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 30
[REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 30
i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button ..............page 26
o [PHRASE REPEAT] button ..................page 29
!0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button
............................................................... page 28
!1 [A-B REPEAT] button...........................page 24
!2 [REW] button........................................ page 23
!3 [FF] button ............................................ page 23
!4 [PAUSE] button ....................................page 23
!1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ....................... page 17
!2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................. page 19
!3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.................... page 19
!4 [SYNC START] button .......................... page 17
In the Song mode
In the Recording mode
In the Song mode
In the Style mode
Setting Up
The “Press & Hold” Symbol
Buttons having this indication can be used to call up
an alternate function when the relevant button is
pressed and held. Hold down this button until the
function is called up.
GrandPno
001
001
q
w
e
t
r
i
o
!0
y
u
!1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6
!7
!8
!9
@1 @2
C1 C2 C3 C4
Song List
(page 56)
Style List
(page 57)
Display
(page 13)
Front Panel
9
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Panel Controls and Terminals
!5 [START/STOP] button...................pages 17, 22
!6 [REC] button ........................................ page 30
!7 [SONG] button ..................................... page 22
!8 [VOICE] button......................................page 14
!9 [STYLE] button .....................................page 17
@0 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]............page 13
@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............page 14
@2 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button...........page 15
@3 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button....... page 25
@4 [REGIST MEMORY] button.................. page 32
@5 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 18
@6 [DUAL] button .......................................page 15
@7 [SPLIT] button.......................................page 15
@8 [HARMONY] button ..............................page 16
@9 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit ....page 14
Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument
assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.
#0 SUSTAIN jack........................................ page 11
#1 USB TO HOST terminal* ......................page 36
#2 AUX IN jack ...........................................page 25
#3 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ........................ page 11
#4 DC IN jack .............................................page 10
* For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computer-
related Operations” (page 4) on the website. When connecting,
use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables
cannot be used.
@3 @4
@0
@5
@6
@7
@8
@9
C5 C6
Voice List
(page 48)
Music Database List
(page 58)
#0
#3 #4
#1 #2
Rear Panel
10
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Power Requirements
Although the instrument will run either from an
optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recom-
mends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An
AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than bat-
teries and does not deplete resources.
Using an AC Power Adaptor
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off
(the backlight display is off).
2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.
3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.
Using Batteries
This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline
(LR6)/Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable
nickel-metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH
batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable Ni-
MH batteries are recommended for this instrument,
since other types may result in poorer battery perfor-
mance.
Installing the batteries
1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off
(display is blank, except for notation staff).
2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the
instrument’s bottom panel.
3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow
the polarity markings on the inside of the compart-
ment.
4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
When battery power becomes too low for proper oper-
ation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be
distorted, and other problems may occur. When this
happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new
ones or already-recharged ones.
• Use the specified adaptor (page 60) only. Using the
wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument
or overheating.
• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC
outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trou-
ble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the
power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet.
Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is
still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When
you are not using the product for a long time, make
sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
• When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that
came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger
device when charging.
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
• Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with bat-
teries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of
data being recorded or transferred at the time.
• This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the
specified charger device when charging.
• Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an
AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the
instrument.
NOTICE
NOTE
11
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Setting the battery type
After installing new batteries and turning the power
on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately
(rechargeable or not) via Function number 042 (page
35).
Using the music rest
Connecting Headphones or
External Audio Equipment
Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo
phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient
monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off
when a plug is inserted into this jack.
The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an
external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUT-
PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system,
mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device
to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.
Connecting a Footswitch to the
SUSTAIN jack
You can produce a natural sustain as you play by
pressing an optional Footswitch plugged into the
[SUSTAIN] jack.
Turning the Power On/Off
Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to
“MIN” then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to
turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust
the [MASTER VOLUME] control. To turn off the
power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for
a second.
While playing the keyboard, use the [MASTER VOL-
UME] control to adjust the volume to an appropriate
level.
• Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of
the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long
period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level,
since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experi-
ence any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-
sician.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-
ponents, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn
off the power for all components.
NOTICE
CAUTION
• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external
device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to
the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the
power off.
• The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 15).
• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to
the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing
this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-
ing in reversed footswitch operation.
• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a
small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the
instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a
long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from
the wall AC outlet.
NOTICE
NOTE
CAUTION
12
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Setting Up
Auto Power Off Function
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this
instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is
not operated for a specified period of time. The
amount of time that will elapse before the power is
automatically turned off is set by default to 30 min-
utes.
To disable the Auto Power Off func-
tion:
Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)
switch to turn on the power while holding down the
lowest key.
To set the time that elapses before Auto
Power Off is executed:
While holding down the [FUNCTION] button, press
the [+] or [-] button several times until “AutoOff”
(Function 041) appears then select the desired value.
Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes)
Default value: 30 (minutes)
Selecting an EQ Setting for the
Best Sound
Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you
the best possible sound when listening through differ-
ent reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal
speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system.
1
Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO]
button for longer than a second to call
up “024 MasterEQ.
“MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few sec-
onds, and the current Master EQ type appears.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select the
desired Master EQ type.
Master EQ types
Changing the Touch Sensitivity of
the Keyboard
You can specify the Touch Sensitivity (how the sound
responds to your playing strength). This can be set via
Function number 007 (page 33).
Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the
power is turned off. For details, see page 36.
• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not
turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified
period of time. Always turn off the power manually when
the instrument is not in use.
• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period
of time while connected to an external device such as an
amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the
instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to
the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-
tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the
power to turn off automatically when a device is con-
nected, disable Auto Power Off.
NOTE
NOTICE
1 Speaker
Optimum for listening via the instru-
ment’s built-in speakers.
2 Headphone
Optimum for headphones, or for listen-
ing via external speakers.
3 Boost Features more powerful sound.
4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance.
5Bright
Lowers the mid range for a brighter
sound.
6 Mild
Lowers the high range for a softer
sound.
024
MasterEQ
024
Speaker
1
13
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Display Items and Basic Operations
Display Items
Basic Operations
Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are
used to select items and change values.
Number buttons
Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or
value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes,
the first zeroes can be omitted.
[-] and [+] buttons
Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or
press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1.
Press and hold either button to continuously increase or
decrease the value in the corresponding direction.
GrandPno
001
003
These indicate the operating condition
of the instrument.
Song/Voice/Style
Normally this indicates the notes you
play. When the Song Lesson function
is used, this indicates the current
notes and chord of playback. When
the Dictionary function (page 21) is
used, this indicates the notes of the
chord you specify.
Notation
Any notes occurring below or above
the staff are indicated by “8va.
For a few specific chords, not all notes
may be shown, due to space limita-
tions in the display.
NOTE
This area indicates the lesson
related status.
Indicates that Keys To
Success (page 26) is on.
Indicates that Phrase
Repeat (page 29) is on.
Indicates the Passing
Status (page 27) of
the Keys To Success
lesson.
Lesson Indication
This area indicates the on/off status
of each function. Each indication is
shown when the corresponding
function is turned on.
... Page 12
... Page
15
... Page
17
... Page
15
... Page
15
... Page
16
On/Off status
Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto
Accompaniment range (page 17) of the keyboard, or
specified via Song playback.
Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or
Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 33) is in use, this indi-
cates the Function number.
Indicates notes currently being played. Indi-
cates the melody and chord notes of a Song
when the Song lesson function is in use.
Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or
when using the Dictionary function.
Chord
Measure or Function
Keyboard Display
003
02
7
Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or
target Track of Song recording.
Lit: Track contains data
Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data
Flashing: Track is selected as recording track
Indicates the current beat of playback.
Song Track status
Beat
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
14
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instru-
ment has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet,
drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical
sounds.
1
Press the [VOICE] button.
The Voice number and name will be shown.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
buttons to select the desired Voice.
Refer to the Voice List on page 48.
3
Play the keyboard.
Preset Voice Types
When you want to reset various settings to default and
simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE
GRAND] button.
The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be
selected as the Main Voice.
The instrument features a built-in metronome (a
device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for
practicing.
1
Press the [METRONOME] button to start
the metronome.
2
Press the [METRONOME] button again
to stop the metronome.
To change the tempo:
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to
instantly reset the value to the default tempo.
To set the Time Signature:
Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up
“TimeSigN” (Functions 032; page 34), then use the
Number buttons.
To set the Metronome Volume:
This can be set via Function number 034 (page 34).
Selecting a Main Voice
001–187 Instrument Voices (including sound effects).
188–205
(Drum Kit)
Various drum and percussion sounds are
assigned to individual keys, from which they
can be played. Details on the instruments and
key assignments of each Drum Kit can be
found in the Drum Kit List on page 53.
206–550 XGlite Voices
000
One Touch Setting (OTS)
The One Touch Setting feature automatically
selects the most suitable Voice when you
select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice
number “000” to activate this feature.
GrandPno
001
Flute
095
Playing the “Grand Piano”
Using the Metronome
Tempo
090
Reference
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
15
In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a differ-
ent Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.
1
Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on.
2
Press the [DUAL] button again to exit
from Dual.
To select a different Dual Voice:
Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suit-
able for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a
different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual]
button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 34),
then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas,
you can play a different Voice between the Left hand
and Right hand areas.
1
Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split.
The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and
Right hand areas.
You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area
of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and
Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the key-
board.
The highest key for the Left hand area is referred
to as the “Split Point” (Function 006;
page 33
)
which can be changed from the default F#2 key.
2
Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit
from Split.
To select a different Split Voice:
Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice”
(Function 016;
page 34
), then use the number buttons
[0]–[9], [+], [-].
You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider
sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing
the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the
Ultra-Wide Stereo effect.
1
Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-
ton to turn it on.
The sound will expand around you—as if the
speaker position is outside of the instrument.
2
Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] but-
ton again to turn it off.
To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type:
Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button
to call up “Wide” (Function 025;
page 34
), then use
the Number buttons.
Layering a Dual Voice
Playing a Split Voice in the Left
Hand area
GrandPno
001
GrandPno
001
Playing with enhanced, more spa-
cious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)
36 48
60 72 84
GrandPno
001
Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
16
You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice.
1
Press the [HARMONY] button to turn
Harmony on.
If you don’t want to have a Harmony effect or har-
mony notes, press the [HARMONY] button again
to turn Harmony off.
Although turning on the Harmony will select a
Harmony Type suitable for the current Main
Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type.
2
Hold down the [HARMONY] button for
longer than a second until “HarmType”
(Functions 026; page 34) appears on the
display.
After “HarmType” is shown for a few seconds, the
current Harmony Type appears.
3
Press the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]
to select the desired Harmony Type.
For details, refer to the Harmony Type list on page
59.
The effect and operation differs depending on the
Harmony Type. Refer to the section on the right
side.
To adjust the Harmony Volume:
This can be adjusted via Function number 027 (
page 34
).
This instrument can apply various Effects as listed
below to the instrument’s sound.
Reverb
Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound.
Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by
selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via
Function number 020 (
page 34
). You can also set the
Reverb depth via Function number 021 (
page 34
).
Chorus
Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spa-
cious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called
up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another
one via Function number 022 (
page 34
).
Sustain
By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function num-
ber 023 (
page 34
), you can add a fixed sustain to the
keyboard Voices. Sustain can also be applied with the
optional footswitch (page 11).
Adding Harmony
GrandPno
001
HarmType
Trio
02
Applying Effects to the Sound
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
17
Playing Styles
This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate
“Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of
Styles covering a wide range of musical genres.
1
Press the [STYLE] button, then use the
number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select
the desired Style.
The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in
the Style List (page 57).
2
Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn
on the Auto Accompaniment.
With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the
left of the Split Point (54: F#2) becomes the “Auto
Accompaniment range” and is used only for spec-
ifying the chords.
The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment
range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can
be changed from the default of F#2 via Function
number 006 (page 33).
3
Press the [SYNC START] button to turn
Synchro Start on.
4
Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-
ment range to start playback.
Play a melody with the right hand and chords with
the left hand.
For information about chords, refer to “Chord
Types for Style Playback” (page 20) or use the
Chord Dictionary function (page 21).
5
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
playback.
You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to
Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,
refer to page 19.
Adjusting the Style Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Style playback
and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This
can be set via Function number 001 (page 33).
8BtModrn
002
LoveSong
021
36 48
7260
LoveSong
021
To play back the rhythm part only
If you press the [START/STOP] button (without press-
ing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the
rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a
melody performance using the entire keyboard range.
NOTE
Playing Styles
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
18
If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired
Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music
Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls
up the ideal settings.
1
Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.
Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start
are automatically turned on.
2
Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to
select the desired Music Database.
This operation calls up the panel settings such as
Voice and Style that are registered to the selected
Music Database. The Music Database List is pro-
vided on the front panel, or in the Music Database
List (page 58).
3
Play the keyboard as described in Steps
4–5 on page 17.
In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an
external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a com-
puter) as Style number 137 which will be used in the
same way as the Preset Styles.
1
Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a
computer to this instrument by using
Musicsoft Downloader.
For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Oper-
ations” (page 4) on the website. You can transfer
two or more Styles to this instrument although
only a single Style can be registered to Style num-
ber 137.
2
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until “StyleReg” (Function 008;
page 33) appears.
After about two seconds, a registerable Style file
name will appear in the display.
3
If necessary, select the desired Style by
using the [+] or [-] button.
4
Press the [0] button.
A confirmation message for the register operation
will appear.
5
Press the [+/YES] button to actually reg-
ister the file.
Using the Music Database
AlvFever
001
Registering a Style File
008
StyleReg
Playing Styles
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
19
Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to
vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match
the song you are playing. These instructions cover a
typical example for using the Sections.
1–3
Same as Steps 1–3 in page 17.
4
Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to
select Main A or Main B.
5
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the
Intro section.
6
Play a chord with your left hand to start
playback of the Intro.
For this example, play a C major chord (as shown
below). For information on how to enter chords,
see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 20.
7
After the Intro finishes, play the key-
board according to the progression of
the Song you are playing.
Play chords with your left hand while playing
melodies with your right hand, and press the
[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The
Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B.
8
Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.
The Section switches to the Ending. When the End-
ing is finished, Style playback stops automatically.
You can have the Ending gradually slow down
(ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.]
button again while the Ending is playing back.
Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo
value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the
Tempo value.
Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset
the value to the default tempo of the current Style or
Song.
Using the Tap function
While a Song or Style is playing back, press the
[TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo
to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is
stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times
to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for
a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song
or Style.
Style Variations—Sections
MAIN A
INTRO≥A
Changing the Tempo
FILL A≥B
ENDING
Tempo
090
Playing Styles
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
20
For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accom-
paniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musi-
cally, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.
indicates the root note.
• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions:
m7, m7
b
5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7
b
5, 6(9), sus2
• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.
• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.
• When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm
and bass parts will be played.
Chord Types for Style Playback
Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh
C
Cm
7
C
Cm
7
CM
7
D
Dm
7
D
Dm
7
DM
7
E
Em
7
E
Em
7
EM
7
C
F
Fm
7
F
Fm
7
FM
7
G
Gm
7
G
Gm
7
GM
7
A
Am
7
A
Am
7
AM
7
B
Bm
7
B
Bm
7
BM
7
Easy Chords
This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three
fingers.
For root “C
To play a major chord
Press the root note ()
of the chord.
To play a minor chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
black key to the left of it.
To play a seventh chord
Press the root note
together with the nearest
white key to the left of it.
To play a minor seventh chord
Press the root note together
with the nearest white and
black keys to the left of it (three
keys altogether).
C
Cm
C
7
Cm
7
Playing Styles
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
21
The Dictionary function is useful when you know the
name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how
to play it.
1
Press and hold the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer
than a second to call up “Dict.
“Dict.” will appear in the display.
This operation will divide the entire keyboard into
the three ranges as illustrated below.
The range to the right of “ROOT ”:
Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no
sound.
The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and
“ROOT ”:
Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no
sound.
The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”:
Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the
above two ranges.
2
As an example, learn how to play a GM7
(G major seventh) chord.
2-1.
Press the “G” key in the section to the right
of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as
the root note.
2-2.
Press the key labeled “M7” in the section
between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.
The notes you should play for the specified
chord (root note and chord type) are conve-
niently shown in the display, both as nota-
tion and in the keyboard diagram.
To call up possible inversions of the chord, press
the [+]/[-] buttons.
3
Following the notation and keyboard
diagram in the display, try playing a
chord in the range to the left of “CHORD
TYPE .
When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell
sound signals your success and the chord name in
the display flashes.
Looking Up Chords Using the
Chord Dictionary
Dict.
• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually
indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers
to C major. However, when specifying major chords
here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the
root note.
• These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary
function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(
#
11 ),
b
5, M7
b
5, M7aug,
m7(11), mM7(9), mM7
b
5, 7
b
5, sus2
Dict.
001
Dict.
001
NOTE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
22
Playing Songs
You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of
the functions, such as Lesson.
Song Category
The Songs are organized by category as listed below.
Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs in
sequence. Playback will repeat continu-
ously, starting again from the first Song
(001).
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button.
1
Press the [SONG] button, then use the
Number buttons to select the desired
Song.
Refer to the Song List (page 56).
2
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
playback.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button
again.
To change the tempo:
Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 19.
Adjusting the Song Volume
To adjust the volume balance between Song playback
and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This
can be set via Function number 002 (page 33).
These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.
Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice
with ease, and another more challenging version.
We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down
from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody
of these songs with your right hand.
Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data).
(Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand
first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.)
These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other
instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.
These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano
pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orches-
tral backing.
Songs you record yourself.
Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 4).
Listening to a Demo Song
• You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing
the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to
the beginning of the selected Song.
Selecting and Playing Back a
Song
NOTE
Elise 1
004
Playing Songs
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
23
With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button
will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeat-
edly. This setting can be changed so that, for example,
all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you
use the instrument as a background music source.
1
Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer
than a second.
“DemoGrp” (Function 038; page 35) is shown in
the display for a few seconds, followed by the cur-
rent repeat playback target.
2
Use the [+] or [-] button to select a play-
back group.
3
Press the [DEMO] button to start play-
back.
To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again
or press the [START/STOP] button.
Random Song Playback
When the Demo Group (above) is set to something
other than “Demo, the playback order via the
[DEMO] button can be changed between numerical
order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNC-
TION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Func-
tion 039;
page 35
) is called up, then select “Normal”
or “Random.
Like the transport controls on an audio player, this
instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW)
and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song.
You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other
desired Voice.
1
Select a Song.
2
Select the desired Voice.
3
Press and hold the [VOICE] button for
longer than a second.
“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display
for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces
the Song’s original melody Voice.
BGM Playback
Demo Preset songs (001–003)
Preset All preset songs (001–102)
User All User songs (103–107)
Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–)
• When User songs and Download songs data do not
exist, Demo songs are played back.
NOTE
Song Fast Forward, Fast
Reverse, and Pause
• When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast
Forward will only work within the range between A and B.
• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song
playback by using the [DEMO] button.
Changing the Melody Voice
• Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody
Voice.
• You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song.
NOTE
NOTE
Playing Songs
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
24
You can play back only a specific section of a Song
repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B
point (end point) in one-measure increments.
1
Start playback of the Song (page 22).
2
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the start point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A
point.
3
When playback reaches to the point you
want to specify as the end point, press
the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set
the B point.
The specified A-B section of the song will now
play repeatedly.
4
To cancel repeat playback, press the
[A-B REPEAT] button.
To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-
ton.
As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), a
Song consists of two Parts, which can be turned on or
off individually by pressing the corresponding button,
L or R.
By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off dur-
ing playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned
on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the
keyboard.
A-B Repeat
• You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song
is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to
select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT]
button for each point, then start playback.
• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the
Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting
playback.
• The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you
select another Song mode.
AB
NOTE
NOTE
Turning Each Part On/Off
• Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the
Parts.
FrereJac
020
010
NOTE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
25
Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers
You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player,
with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you
play the keyboard along with playback of your music player.
1
Turn off the power for both the external
audio device and this instrument.
2
Connect the audio device to the instru-
ment’s [AUX IN] jack.
Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at
one side for connecting to this instrument and the
plug matching the output jack of the external
audio device at the other side.
3
Turn on the external audio device, then
this instrument.
4
Play back the connected external audio
device.
The sound of the audio device is output through
the speakers of this instrument.
5
Adjust the volume balance between the
audio device and this instrument.
In general, the volume should be adjusted on the
connected audio device.
6
Play the keyboard along with the sound
of the audio device.
7
After finishing the performance, stop
playback of the audio device.
When the sound of the external audio device is output
through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the
volume of the sound located in the center of stereo
playback. Since most melody parts such as vocal are
located in the center of the stereo sound, you can use
the function to cancel the melody part then practice it
via the keyboard.
1
Play back the connected external audio
device.
2
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton to turn it on.
The volume of the sound located in the center of
stereo playback will be canceled or lowered.
3
Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] but-
ton again to turn it off.
• You can adjust the volume of the sound input via the
[AUX IN] jack from the external audio device. To do this,
hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for lon-
ger than a second to call up “AuxInVol” (Function 003;
page 33), then adjust the value by using the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
NOTE
• Before connecting, turn off the power of both this
instrument and the external audio device. Also,
before turning the power on or off, make sure to set
all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage
to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent
hearing loss may occur.
• After connecting, first turn on the power to the exter-
nal audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this
order when you turn the power off.
Using the Melody Suppressor
• Depending on the music, the melody or vocal sound
may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody
Suppressor is turned on.
CAUTION
NOTICE
MelodySP
on
NOTE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
26
Using the Song Lesson Feature
You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,
“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat. Keys to Success helps you master a
Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in
playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a spe-
cific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we
suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song
Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registra-
tion at the following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in
the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain
the Song Book, complete the user registration at the
following website:
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in
the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the
entire Song.
1
Prepare the Song Book.
Download the Song Book from the above website,
or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the
end of this manual.
The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are
pre-programmed) will differ depending on the
Song. For details, refer to the Song Book.
2
Press the [SONG] button, then select a
Song for your lesson.
Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the
“LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the cor-
responding page of the Song Book.
3
Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button
to engage this lesson.
The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R”
or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating
that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If you
have already passed several Steps, the next Step
number appears on the display.
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to start
Lesson.
After the lead-in, playback of the current Step
starts.
5
Practice the phrase in the current Step.
Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the
notes shown on the display, press the notes.
Downloading the Song Book
Keys To Success
• All preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with
this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category
Songs.
NOTE
Elise 1
004
• For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is
applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may
be slower than original.
Step01
Step01
001
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
27
6
Confirm the evaluation in the current
Step.
When the current Step reaches the end, your per-
formance will be evaluated and your score (from
0–100) is shown in the display.
A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did
not pass this Step and you should try the same
Step again, which begins automatically. A score of
“60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step
and you should try the next Step, which begins
automatically.
7
Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on.
In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all
the way through the Song. When you pass all
Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automati-
cally be turned off and playback stops.
8
To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO
SUCCESS] button.
Confirming the Passing Status
You can confirm the passing status of each Song sim-
ply by selecting a Song and each Step.
When Step is selected
When Song is selected
Clearing the Passing Status
You can clear existing passing status entries for the
entire Song or a specific Step of the Song.
To clear the passing status entries of all Steps:
Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS
TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds,
with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared”
message will appear on the display.
To clear the passing status entry for a specific
Step:
Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success,
select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO
SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A
“Cleared” message will appear on the display.
• If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the
Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of
the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice
appears in the display.
• Even during lesson, you can select another Step by
using the [+]/[-] buttons.
Excellen
068
NOTE
NOTE
• This operation cannot be executed during playback.
Step01
001
Elise 1
004
001
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
28
Lesson 1—Listening
In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The
model melody/chords of the part you selected will
sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well.
Lesson 2—Timing
In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the
notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong
notes, the correct notes shown in the display will
sound.
Lesson 3—Waiting
In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on
the display. The Song pauses until you play the right
note, and playback tempo will change to match the
speed at which you are playing at.
1
Press the [SONG] button then select a
Song for your lesson.
2
Press either or both the [R] and [L] but-
tons to select the part you want to prac-
tice.
3
Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button to start playback of
the Song Lesson.
After starting playback, pressing this button
repeatedly will change the Lesson number from
1: LISTENING 2: TIMING 3: WAITING
off 1…. Press this button until the desired num-
ber is shown on the display.
4
When Lesson playback reaches to the
end, check your evaluation Grade on the
display.
“2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your
performance in four levels.
After the evaluation display has appeared, the les-
son will start again from the beginning.
5
Stop the Lesson mode.
You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by
pressing the [START/STOP] button.
Listening, Timing and Waiting
• If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained dur-
ing Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF
via the Function number 037 (page 35).
• The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs
(SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page
36), but cannot be applied to the User Songs.
• In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the
current Song does not contain a left-hand part.
NOTE
NOTE
RightLeft
BothHand
NOTE
• During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by
pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any
time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
• When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key
position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave
units), depending on the selected Voice.
• The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during les-
sons.
NOTE
~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~
~~~~
~~
Excellent
Very Good
Good
OK
NOTE
NOTE
Using the Song Lesson Feature
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
29
You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page
26) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson
(page 28).
1
Enable the Keys to Success lesson.
Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 26.
2
Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-]
buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING
2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly
to select the desired lesson.
The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys
to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current
Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for
each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is
Nice” appears, and the passing status is not avail-
able.
3
To return to only the Keys to Success
mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING
3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select
“off.
4
To exit from the Lesson mode, press the
[KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.
You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by select-
ing a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-pro-
grammed in the Preset Songs. You can confirm the
Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 4).
Practicing only a single Phrase
During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT]
button at the phrase you want to practice. The corre-
sponding Phrase number will appear in the display
and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off
the L or R part, then practice the phrase repeatedly
until you are satisfied.
Even during repeat playback, you can select any other
phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can
return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE
REPEAT] button again.
Using Phrase Repeat with Listening,
Timing or Waiting
With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTEN-
ING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or
three times to start and use Lesson playback with
Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several
times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback
and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode.
Practicing two or more Phrases
By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as
the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases
repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the
[A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to
Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase,
press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase
B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat play-
back between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this set-
ting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again.
Keys to Success with Listening,
Timing or Waiting
Phrase Repeat
• In this status, the evaluation function is not available.
• You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped
by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons.
• Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between
Point A and the end of the Song.
REPEAT
P03
NOTE
NOTE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
30
Recording Your Performance
You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers
103–107). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument.
You can record your performance to the following two
tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously.
Track 1:
Your melody performance is recorded to this track.
Track 2:
Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord
changes and Section changes), is recorded to this
track.
Recording Data Capacity:
A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord
changes can be recorded to the five User Songs.
The operation is convenient for recording a new Song
without having to specify a track.
1
Make the desired settings such as Voice
and Style settings.
If you want to record only the melody perfor-
mance, turn ACMP off (page 17). If you want to
record Style playback as well as melody perfor-
mance, turn ACMP on (page 17).
2
Press the [REC] button to enable the
Record mode.
On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User
Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select
another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons.
To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC]
button again to stop flashing on the display.
3
Play the keyboard to start recording.
If ACMP is turned on, you can independently
record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by
pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing
the Section (page 19).
4
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop
recording.
When using a Style, you can stop recording also
by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then
waiting until playback ends.
5
To play back the recorded Song, press
the [START/STOP] button.
Track Structure of a Song
Quick Recording
• If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1” will
automatically be selected. In this case, you will record
over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” so be
careful that you won’t be erasing any material you
want to keep!
• ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you
can select another Style in this status by using the
[STYLE] and Number buttons.
• After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown
on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the
power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so
can damage the internal memory and result in a loss
of data.
User 1
rEC
001
NOTICE
NOTE
36 48
7260
NOTICE
Recording Your Performance
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
31
1
Make the desired settings, such as
those of Voice or Style.
If you want to record the melody performance,
turn ACMP off (page 17). If you want to record
Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 17).
2
While holding down the [REC] button,
press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to
engage the Record mode.
If you want to record Style playback, make sure to
select the Track 2. If you want to record melody
performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as
desired. The illustration below is the example
when selecting Track 2.
3
Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the
User Song you want to record.
If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for
example and Track 1 contains already recorded
data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning
on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will deter-
mine whether you listen to a previously recorded
Track or not while recording a new Track.
4
Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 30) in
“Quick Recording.
1
Press the [SONG] button then select the
desired User Song by using the Number
buttons.
2
Press and hold the [REC] button for lon-
ger than a second.
A confirmation message appears.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
3
Press the [+/YES] button.
A confirmation message appears again.
To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button.
4
Press the [+/YES] button to clear the
Song.
A “Writing!” message appears while the track is
being cleared.
Recording to a Specified Track
Limitations while Recording
You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome
click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings.
The following settings and buttons are not available,
or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded:
ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus
Type, Harmony Type, [FUNCTION] button, [POR-
TABLE GRAND] button.
User 1
rEC
001
Clearing a User Song
ClrUser1
YES
Sure?
YES
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
32
Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings
This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that
lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall
whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can
be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9.
1
Make the desired settings such as those
for Voice and Style.
2
Press and hold down the [REGIST MEM-
ORY] button for longer than a second.
“MemNo.?” appears on the display.
3
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to mem-
orize the current panel settings.
If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, an “Overwr?” message
appears in the display. To overwrite, press the
[+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO].
1
Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button.
“LoadNo.?” appears on the display.
2
Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call
up the panel settings you memorized.
The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears
in the display for a few seconds.
The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed
by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons.
Memorizing Panel Settings to
the Registration Memory
• If you select a Registration Memory number that
already contains data, the previous data is deleted
and overwritten by the new data.
• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings
to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may
be damaged or lost.
MemNo.?
NOTICE
Recalling Panel Settings from
the Registration Memory
Parameters that can be memorized to Registra-
tion Memory
Style settings*
Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume,
Tempo, Main A/B
Voice settings
Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of
the related Functions
Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the
related Functions
Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the
related Functions
Effect settings:
Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type
Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of
the related Functions
Other settings:
Sustain on/off, Transpose
* Available only when a Style is selected
LoadNo.?
REGIST 1
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
33
The Functions
The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters
such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects.
1
Press the [FUNCTION] button several
times until the desired item appears.
Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the
Function number increases one by one. You can
also decrease the Function number by one when
you press the [-] button briefly while holding
down the [FUNCTION] button.
After a few seconds, the Function name may be
replaced with the setting value depending on the
selected Function.
2
Set the value by using the number but-
tons [0]–[9], [+], [-].
• The Function number does not appear in the display
during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat
value appears instead.
001
StyleVol
100
NOTE
• To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons;
[SONG], [VOICE], [STYLE] or [GRAND PIANO].
NOTE
Function List
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
Vol ume
001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 17)
002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 22)
003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100
Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to
the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 25)
Overall
004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.
005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz
Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in
approx. 0.2Hz increments.
006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2)
Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split
“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)
and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-
ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.
007 Touch Sensitivity TouchSns
1 (Soft),
2 (Medium),
3 (Hard),
4 (Off)
2 (Medium)
Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in
response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Off) is selected, Touch
Response is off and the volume level does not change at all
regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard.
Style file
008 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn
Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from
computer (page 18).
The Functions
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
34
Main Voice (page 14)
009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice.
010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.
011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Dual Voice (page 15)
012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–550 * Selects a Dual Voice.
013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.
014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.
015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Dual Voices signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Split Voice (page 15)
016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–550 45 (FngrBass) Selects a Split Voice.
017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.
018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.
019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 *
Determines how much of the Split Voices signal is sent to the
Chorus effect.
Effects
020 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 59)
021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64
Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb
effect.
022 Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (page 59)
023 Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the Sustain function is on or off.
024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ
1 (Speaker)
2 (Headphone)
3 (Boost)
4 (Piano)
5 (Bright)
6 (Mild)
1 (Speaker)
Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum
sound in different listening situations. (page 12)
025 Wide Type Wide
1 (Wide1)
2 (Wide2)
3 (Wide3)
2 (Wide2)
Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.
Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 15)
Harmony (page 16)
026 Harmony Type HarmType 0126 *
Determines the Harmony type.
Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 59.
027 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 *
Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the
Harmony types 1–5 is selected.
Computer (page 35)
028 PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF
Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer
(page 35).
MIDI
029 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON
Determines whether the instruments keyboard controls the inter-
nal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.
030 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal
clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your key-
board performance to the application software on the computer
via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.
031 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO
Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press
[+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should
be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the
computer.
Metronome (page 14)
032
Time Signature
Numerator
TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.
033
Time Signature
Denominator
TimeSigD
Half note, Quarter
note, Eighth note,
Sixteenth note
** Determines the length of each metronome beat.
034 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
The Functions
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
35
* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.
** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song or Style.
PC Mode (FUNCTION 028)
The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).
* An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use.
** Cannot be set independently.
Lesson (page 26)
035 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 1
Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.
The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred
from a computer.
036 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 2
Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The
setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from
a computer.
037 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON
This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON,
playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are play-
ing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained
regardless of the speed you are playing at.
Demo (page 22)
038 Demo Group DemoGrp
1 (Demo)
2 (Preset)
3 (User)
4 (Download)
1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group.
039 Demo Play Mode PlayMode
1 (Normal)
2 (Random)
1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode.
040 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF
Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is
set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button
is pressed.
Auto Power Off (page 12)
041 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff
OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/
120 (minutes)
30 minutes
Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is
automatically turned off.
Battery (page 11)
042 Battery Type Battery
1 (Alkaline)
2 (Ni-MH)
1 (Alkaline)
Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument.
Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery
Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery
Function
Number
Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions
PC1 PC2* OFF
LOCAL Off Off On
EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off
MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes
MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes
MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes
• MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs.
NOTE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
36
Using with a Computer or iPad/iPhone
This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument
Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard
performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/
Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer con-
nected via a USB cable. For details on using a com-
puter with this instrument, refer to the “Computer-
related Operations” (page 4) on the website.
By connecting your iPad/iPhone to the instrument,
you can take advantage of various functions. To make
connections, prepare the optional i-UX1, then refer to
the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” (page 4) on the
website.
Backup and Initialization
The following Backup parameters will be maintained
even if the power is turned off.
In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the
data (including Style data that have not been loaded)
transferred from the connected computer will be
maintained even if you turn off the power.
You can initialize your original data via the following
two methods.
Backup Clear
This operation initializes the backup parameters.
While holding down the highest white key, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Flash Clear
This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that
have been transferred from a computer. Note that
Style data registered to Style numbers 137 will be
maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest
white key and the three highest black keys, press the
[ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on.
Connecting to a computer
• If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instru-
ment, you need to register it to this instrument for Style play-
back.
NOTE
Data that can be transferred from a computer to
this instrument (and vice versa).
Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1
Style: (.sty)
Backup File: PSR-E343.BUP *
* Backup parameters other than “Passing status of Song and
Step” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Music-
soft Downloader as a single Backup file.
Connecting an iPad/iPhone
NOTE
Backup Parameters
Backup parameters
User Songs (page 30)
Style Number 137 (page 18)
Registration Memory (page 32)
Passing status of Song and Step (page 27)
FUNCTION Settings: (page 33)
Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,
Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo,
Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel,
Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off,
Battery Type
Initialization
• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you
have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a
computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For
details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 4).
NOTICE
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
37
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping
sound is temporarily produced.
This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.
When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-
ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from
the instrument.
Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or head-
phones when using the instrument with the application
on iPhone/iPad.
When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad,
we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in
order to avoid noise caused by communication.
There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or
when a song or style is being played back.
Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear
panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.
Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 34 Function 029.)
Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does
not produce any sound.
When using the Dictionary function (page 21), the keys in the right hand area
are used only for entering the chord root and type.
Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems
to be cut off.
The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual
voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.
Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.
The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the
selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it
by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then
play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–
26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is neces-
sary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.
The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/
STOP] button is pressed.
Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to
“Function Settings” on page 34 (Function 030).
The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the
[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.
Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-
related function.
The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 33 Function 001) is set to an appropri-
ate level.
Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set
the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 33 Function 006).
Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press
the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.
The Style does not sound as you play a chord. The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords
are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-
enth).
Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played
chord.
Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-
ment based only on the root.
The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-
site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off
the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.
The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is
properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.
The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings
(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual
sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.
The volume is too soft.
The sound quality is poor.
The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.
The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-
rectly.
The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel
settings are reset.
The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new
ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.
Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated
(page 12). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in
the Function settings (page 35 Function 041).
Appendix
38
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song Book Sample
This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).
The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and
important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.
* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.
This example introduces part of the English song book.
Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
Für Elise
Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.
The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.
In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!
First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!
Für Elise With Step Map
.......................................................................12
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” .....................................16
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16
First Half Review ...................................................................... 17
Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18
“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18
“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19
Second Half Review ................................................................... 19
Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19
L. v. Beethoven
Song Book Sample
39
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Before Playing...
Sit Correctly Finger Numbering
Left Right
3
1
1
5
3
4
4
5
2
2
Sit near the middle of the keyboard.
Reading the Score
The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef
BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDEFGACC
M
i
d
d
l
e
Treble clef
Bass clef
Time Signatures and Counting Time
4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time
3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time
1 octave
2 black keys 3 black keys
Accidentals
(Sharp) Raise a semitone
B
(Flat) Lower a semitone
N
(Natural) Return to normal pitch
Key signature
Clef
Time signature
Notes and Rests
Whole note
Dotted half note
Half note
Dotted quarter note
Quarter note
Eighth note
Sixteenth note
Whole note rest
Dotted half note rest
Half note rest
Dotted quarter note rest
Quarter note rest
Eighth note rest
Sixteenth note rest


1234
Song Book Sample
40
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004
Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.
Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as
you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency.
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
With Step Map
From here...
Song Book Sample
41
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
...to here From here...
...to here
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Song Book Sample
42
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”
Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand.
We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the
illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get
started!
You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly.
F
i
n
g
e
r
s
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
t
h
i
s
e
x
e
r
c
i
s
e
Right
Tip-toe
ABCD
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
A E
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Go back to the beginning and play it again.
Song Book Sample
43
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.
The melody will be built up little by little.
Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.
Short break
Almost done
E
Song Book Sample
44
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”
And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.
It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start.
Don’t play the black keys too strongly.
Left hand
AEAE
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Diligent Practice Time
Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play
smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first
phrase.
Song Book Sample
45
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
Diligent Practice Time
OK, let’s begin the second half!
You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs.
It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.
Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.
First Half Review
You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?
Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble
playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.
Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note!
Song Book Sample
46
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
EEE
Jump to the
next E!
And again!
C
M
i
d
d
l
e
Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”
The first note has a staccato dot.
Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note!
Left hand
“EEEEE!”
The only note in this step is E!
Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.
Y
o
u
c
a
n
p
l
a
y
t
h
i
s
w
i
t
h
o
n
l
y
t
h
e
s
e
f
i
n
g
e
r
s
!
Song Book Sample
47
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song No.004 Für Elise Basic
Left
Right
Für Elise
Song No.004
Basic
“Left! Right! Left! Right!”
Play “D
E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.
Have the next hand ready in position to play D
so you won’t have to rush.
Second Half Review
Try playing all the way through the second half.
As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps.
Play the Whole Song!
This is the finishing step!
Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.
Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.
48
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Voice List
Maximum Polyphony
The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means
that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless
of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number
of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the
total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is
correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and
Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier
played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have
priority (last note priority).
The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each
voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the
instrument via MIDI from an external device.
Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program
Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-
gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take
this into consideration.
Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after
the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)
is held.
NOTE
Panel Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
PIANO
1 0 112 1 Grand Piano
2 0 112 2 Bright Piano
3 0 112 7 Harpsichord
4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano
5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano
601133CP 80
E.PIANO
7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano
8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines
9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano
10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano
11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano
12 0 112 8 Clavi
ORGAN
13 0 118 19 Cool! Organ
14 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ
15 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1
16 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2
17 0 112 19 Rock Organ
18 0 114 19 Purple Organ
19 0 112 18 Click Organ
20 0 116 17 Bright Organ
21 0 127 19 Theater Organ
22 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ
23 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ
24 0 113 20 Chapel Organ
25 0 112 20 Pipe Organ
26 0 112 21 Reed Organ
ACCORDION
27 0 112 22 Musette Accordion
28 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion
29 0 113 24 Bandoneon
30 0 113 23 Modern Harp
31 0 112 23 Harmonica
GUITAR
32 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar
33 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven
34 0 112 25 Classical Guitar
35 0 112 26 Folk Guitar
36 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar
37 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar
38 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar
39 0 112 28 Clean Guitar
40 0 113 27 Octave Guitar
41 0 112 29 Muted Guitar
42 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar
43 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar
BASS
44 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass
45 0 112 34 Finger Bass
46 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass
47 0 112 35 Pick Bass
48 0 112 36 Fretless Bass
49 0 112 37 Slap Bass
50 0 121 40 Funk Bass
51 0 112 39 Synth Bass
52 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass
53 0 113 40 Dance Bass
STRINGS
54 0 112 49 String Ensemble
55 0 112 50 Chamber Strings
56 0 115 50 Marcato Strings
57 0 113 50 Slow Strings
58 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings
59 0 112 51 Synth Strings
60 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings
61 0 112 41 Violin
62 0 112 43 Cello
63 0 112 44 Contrabass
64 0 112 47 Harp
65 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit
CHOIR
66 0 112 53 Choir
67 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble
68 0 112 55 Air Choir
69 0 112 54 Vox Humana
SAXOPHONE
70 0 112 67 Tenor Sax
71 0 112 66 Alto Sax
72 0 112 65 Soprano Sax
73 0 112 68 Baritone Sax
74 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
75 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble
76 0 112 72 Clarinet
77 0 112 69 Oboe
78 0 112 70 English Horn
79 0 112 71 Bassoon
TRUMPET
80 0 112 57 Trumpet
81 0 112 58 Trombone
82 0 113 58 Trombone Section
83 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet
84 0 112 61 French Horn
85 0 112 59 Tuba
BRASS
86 0 112 62 Brass Section
87 0 113 62 Big Band Brass
88 0 116 62 Octave Brass
89 0 113 63 80s Brass
90 0 119 62 Mellow Horns
91 0 115 63 Funky Brass
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice N am e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
49
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices
sound at the same time.
92 0 114 63 Techno Brass
93 0 112 63 Synth Brass
FLUTE
94 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute
95 0 112 74 Flute
96 0 112 73 Piccolo
97 0 112 76 Pan Flute
98 0 112 75 Recorder
99 0 112 80 Ocarina
SYNTH
100 0 112 81 Square Lead
101 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead
102 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw
103 0 112 88 Under Heim
104 0 112 85 Portatone
105 0 115 82 Analogon
106 0 119 82 Fargo
107 0 112 86 Voice Lead
108 0 121 82 Funky Lead
109 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven
110 0 121 89 Dream Heaven
111 0 113 89 Symbiont
112 0 112 9 9 St a r D u st
113 0 112 101 Br ig ht ne ss
114 0 112 92 Xenon Pad
115 0 112 95 Equinox
116 0 112 8 9 Fa nt as ia
117 0 113 9 0 Da r k M o on
118 0 113 101 Bell Pad
119 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad
120 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance
PERCUSSION
121 0 112 12 Vibraphone
122 0 112 13 Marimba
123 0 112 14 Xylophone
124 0 112 115 Steel Drums
125 0 112 9 Celesta
126 0 112 11 Music Box
127 0 112 15 Tubular Bells
128 0 112 48 Timpani
129 0 116 117 Tabla
WORLD
130 0 112 106 Banjo
131 0 0 111 Fiddle
132 0 0 110 Bagpipe
133 0 0 16 Dulcimer
134 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2
135 0 115 111 Er Hu
136 0 117 74 Di Zi
137 0 116 106 Pi Pa
138 0 113 108 Gu Zheng
139 0 120 111 Morin Khuur
140 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed)
141 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed)
142 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed)
143 0 114 105 Tanpura
144 0 0 105 Sitar
145 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar
146 0 97 16 Santur
147 0 0 112 Shanai
148 0 98 106 Oud
149 0 97 108 Kanoon
150 0 0 109 Kalimba
151 0 0 107 Shamisen
152 0 0 108 Koto
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
DUAL*
153 Octave Piano
154 Piano & Strings
155 Piano Pad
156 Octave Harpsichord
157 Tiny Electric Piano
158 E.P. Pad
159 Full Organ
160 Octave Jazz Guitar
161 Octave Strings
162 Orchestra Section
163 Octave Pizzicato Strings
164 Strings Session
165 Brass Tutti
166 Orchestra Tutti
167 Octave French Horns
168 Octave Harp
169 Orchestra Hit & Timpani
170 Octave Choir
171 Jazz Brass Section
172 Jazz Section
173 Ballroom Sax Ensemble
174 Ballroom Brass
175 Flute & Clarinet
176 Trumpet & Trombone
177 Fat Synth Brass
178 Octave Lead
179 Super 5th Lead
SOUND EFFECTS
1800 0121Fret Noise
181 0 0 122 Breath Noise
1820 0123Seashore
183 0 0 124 Bird Tweet
184 0 0 125 Telephone Ring
185 0 0 126 Helicopter
186 0 0 127 Applause
1870 0128Gunshot
DRUM KITS
188 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1
189 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2
190 127 0 9 Room Kit
191 127 0 17 Rock Kit
192 127 0 25 Electronic Kit
193 127 0 26 Analog Kit
194 127 0 113 Dance Kit
195 127 0 33 Jazz Kit
196 127 0 41 Brush Kit
197 127 0 49 Symphony Kit
198 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.
199 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1
200 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2
201 126 0 37 Arabic Kit
202 126 0 41 Cuban Kit
203 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1
204 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2
205 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice N am e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
50
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
XGlite Voice List
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
XG Piano
206 0 0 1 Grand Piano
207 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP
208 0 40 1 Piano Strings
209 0 41 1 Dream
210 0 0 2 Bright Piano
211 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP
212 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano
213 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP
214 0 32 3 Detuned CP80
215 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano
216 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP
217 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1
218 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP
219 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1
220 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2
221 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP
222 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2
223 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano
224 0 0 7 Harpsichord
225 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP
226 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2
227 0 0 8 Clavi
228 0 1 8 Clavi KSP
XG CHROMATIC
229 0 0 9 Celesta
230 0 0 10 Glockenspiel
231 0 0 11 Music Box
232 0 64 11 Orgel
233 0 0 12 Vibraphone
234 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP
235 0 0 13 Marimba
236 0 1 13 Marimba KSP
237 0 64 13 Sine Marimba
238 0 97 13 Balimba
239 0 98 13 Log Drums
240 0 0 14 Xylophone
241 0 0 15 Tubular Bells
242 0 96 15 Church Bells
243 0 97 15 Carillon
XG ORGAN
244 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ
245 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ
246 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1
247 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2
248 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1
249 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3
250 0 40 17 16+2'2/3
251 0 64 17 Organ Bass
252 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2
253 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ
254 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2
255 0 0 18 Percussive Organ
256 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ
257 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ
258 0 33 18 Light Organ
259 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2
260 0 0 19 Rock Organ
261 0 64 19 Rotary Organ
262 0 65 19 Slow Rotary
263 0 66 19 Fast Rotary
264 0 0 20 Church Organ
265 0 32 20 Church Organ 3
266 0 35 20 Church Organ 2
267 0 40 20 Notre Dame
268 0 64 20 Organ Flute
269 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute
270 0 0 21 Reed Organ
271 0 40 21 Puff Organ
272 0 0 22 Accordion
273 0 0 23 Harmonica
274 0 32 23 Harmonica 2
275 0 0 24 Tango Accordion
276 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2
XG GUITAR
277 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar
278 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3
279 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics
280 0 96 25 Ukulele
281 0 0 26 Steel Guitar
282 0 35 26 12-string Guitar
283 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar
284 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound
285 0 96 26 Mandolin
286 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar
287 0 32 27 Jazz Amp
288 0 0 28 Clean Guitar
289 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar
290 0 0 29 Muted Guitar
291 0 40 29 Funk Guitar
292 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar
293 0 45 29 Jazz Man
294 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar
295 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch
296 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar
297 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar
298 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2
299 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics
300 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback
301 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2
XG BASS
302 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass
303 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm
304 0 45 33
Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass
305 0 0 34 Finger Bass
306 0 18 34 Finger Dark
307 0 40 34
Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar
308 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass
309 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2
310 0 65 34 Modulated Bass
311 0 0 35 Pick Bass
312 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass
313 0 0 36 Fretless Bass
314 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2
315 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3
316 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4
317 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1
318 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass
319 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2
320 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap
321 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1
322 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass
323 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2
324 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass
325 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass
326 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass
327 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark
328 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass
329 0 41 40 DX Bass
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice N am e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
51
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
XG STRINGS
330 0 0 41 Violin
331 0 8 41 Slow Violin
332 0 0 42 Viola
333 0 0 43 Cello
334 0 0 44 Contrabass
335 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings
336 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings
337 0 40 45 Suspense Strings
338 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings
339 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp
340 0 0 48 Timpani
XG ENSEMBLE
341 0 0 49 Strings 1
342 0 3 49 Stereo Strings
343 0 8 49 Slow Strings
344 0 35 49 60s Strings
345 0 40 49 Orchestra
346 0 41 49 Orchestra 2
347 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra
348 0 45 49 Velocity Strings
349 0 0 50 Strings 2
350 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings
351 0 8 50 Legato Strings
352 0 40 50 Warm Strings
353 0 41 50 Kingdom
354 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1
355 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4
356 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2
357 0 0 53 Choir Aahs
358 0 3 53 Stereo Choir
359 0 32 53 Mellow Choir
360 0 40 53 Choir Strings
361 0 0 54 Voice Oohs
362 0 0 55 Synth Voice
363 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2
364 0 41 55 Choral
365 0 64 55 Analog Voice
366 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit
367 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2
368 0 64 56 Impact
XG BRASS
369 0 0 57 Trumpet
370 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet
371 0 0 58 Trombone
372 0 18 58 Trombone 2
373 0 0 59 Tuba
374 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet
375 0 0 61 French Horn
376 0 6 61 French Horn Solo
377 0 32 61 French Horn 2
378 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra
379 0 0 62 Brass Section
380 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section
381 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1
382 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass
383 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2
384 0 18 64 Soft Brass
385 0 41 64 Choir Brass
XG REED
386 0 0 65 Soprano Sax
387 0 0 66 Alto Sax
388 0 40 66 Sax Section
389 0 0 67 Tenor Sax
390 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax
391 0 0 68 Baritone Sax
392 0 0 69 Oboe
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
393 0 0 70 English Horn
394 0 0 71 Bassoon
395 0 0 72 Clarinet
XG PIPE
396 0 0 73 Piccolo
397 0 0 74 Flute
398 0 0 75 Recorder
399 0 0 76 Pan Flute
400 0 0 77 Blown Bottle
401 0 0 79 Whistle
402 0 0 80 Ocarina
XG SYNTH LEAD
403 0 0 81 Square Lead
404 0 6 81 Square Lead 2
405 0 8 81 LM Square
406 0 18 81 Hollow
407 0 19 81 Shroud
408 0 64 81 Mellow
409 0 65 81 Solo Sine
410 0 66 81 Sine Lead
411 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead
412 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2
413 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth
414 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth
415 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth
416 0 20 82 Big Lead
417 0 24 82 Heavy Synth
418 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog
419 0 0 83 Calliope Lead
420 0 65 83 Pure Lead
421 0 0 84 Chiff Lead
422 0 0 85 Charang Lead
423 0 64 85 Distorted Lead
424 0 0 86 Voice Lead
425 0 0 87 Fifths Lead
426 0 35 87 Big Five
427 0 0 88 Bass & Lead
428 0 16 88 Big & Low
429 0 64 88 Fat & Perky
430 0 65 88 Soft Whirl
XG SYNTH PAD
431 0 0 89 New Age Pad
432 0 64 89 Fantasy
433 0 0 90 Warm Pad
434 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad
435 0 0 92 Choir Pad
436 0 66 92 Itopia
437 0 0 93 Bowed Pad
438 0 0 94 Metallic Pad
439 0 0 95 Halo Pad
440 0 0 96 Sweep Pad
XG SYNTH EFFECTS
441 0 0 97 Rain
442 0 64 97 Harmo Rain
443 0 65 97 African Wind
444 0 66 97 Carib
445 0 0 98 Sound Track
446 0 27 98 Prologue
447 0 0 99 Crystal
448 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp
449 0 14 99 Popcorn
450 0 18 99 Tiny Bells
451 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel
452 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes
453 0 41 99 Clear Bells
454 0 42 99 Chorus Bells
455 0 65 99 Soft Crystal
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice N am e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
Voice List
52
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
456 0 70 99 Air Bells
457 0 71 99 Bell Harp
458 0 72 99 Gamelimba
459 0 0 100 Atmosphere
460 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere
461 0 19 100 Hollow Release
462 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano
463 0 64 100 Nylon Harp
464 0 65 100 Harp Vox
465 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad
466 0 0 101 Brightness
467 0 0 102 Goblins
468 0 64 102 Goblins Synth
469 0 65 102 Creeper
470 0 67 102 Ritual
471 0 68 102 To Heaven
472 0 70 102 Night
473 0 71 102 Glisten
474 0 96 102 Bell Choir
475 0 0 103 Echoes
476 0 65 103 Big Pan
477 0 0 104 Sci-Fi
XG WORLD
478 0 96 16 Cimbalom
479 0 40 47 Yang Chin
480 0 0 78 Shakuhachi
481 0 35 105 Sitar 2
482 0 97 105 Tamboura
483 0 0 106 Banjo
484 0 28 106 Muted Banjo
485 0 96 106 Rabab
486 0 97 106 Gopichant
487 0 96 108 Taisho-kin
XG PERCUSSIVE
488 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell
489 0 96 113 Bonang
490 0 97 113 Altair
491 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs
492 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs
493 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal
494 0 0 114 Agogo
495 0 0 115 Steel Drums
496 0 97 115 Glass Percussion
497 0 98 115 Thai Bells
498 0 0 116 Woodblock
499 0 96 116 Castanets
500 0 0 117 Taiko Drum
501 0 96 117 Gran Cassa
502 0 0 118 Melodic Tom
503 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2
504 0 65 118 Real Tom
505 0 66 118 Rock Tom
506 0 0 119 Synth Drum
507 0 64 119 Analog Tom
508 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion
509 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal
XG SOUND EFFECTS
510 64 0 1 Cutting Noise
511 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2
512 64 0 4 String Slap
513 64 0 17 Flute Key Click
514 64 0 33 Shower
515 64 0 34 Thunder
51664035Wind
517 64 0 36 Stream
518 64 0 37 Bubble
519 64 0 38 Feed
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice Name
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
520 64 0 49 Dog
521 64 0 50 Horse
522 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2
523 64 0 56 Maou
524 64 0 65 Phone Call
525 64 0 66 Door Squeak
526 64 0 67 Door Slam
527 64 0 68 Scratch Cut
528 64 0 69 Scratch Split
529 64 0 70 Wind Chime
530 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2
531 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition
532 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal
533 64 0 83 Car Passing
534 64 0 84 Car Crash
535 64 0 85 Siren
536 64 0 86 Train
537 64 0 87 Jet Plane
538 64 0 88 Starship
539 64 0 89 Burst
540 64 0 90 Roller Coaster
541 64 0 91 Submarine
542 64 0 97 Laugh
543 64 0 98 Scream
544 64 0 99 Punch
545 64 0 100 Heartbeat
546 64 0 101 Footsteps
547 64 0 113 Machine Gun
548 64 0 114 Laser Gun
549 64 0 115 Explosion
550 64 0 116 Firework
Voice
No.
Bank Select
MIDI
Program
Change#
(1–128)
Voice N am e
MSB
(0–127)
LSB
(0–127)
53
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Drum Kit List
• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”
(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).
Voice No. 188 189 190 191 192 193
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026
Keyboard MIDI
Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit
Note#NoteNote#Note
25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2
SD Rock H Snare L SD Rock H
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Analog L
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2
BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick
Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Analog Snare 1
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare 2
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L
Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed
Analog HH Closed 1
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H
Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1Hi-Hat Pedal
Analog HH Closed 2
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom
Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open
Analog HH Open
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L
Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H
Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1
Analog Cymbal
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom
Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open
Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L
Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H
84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long
87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open
Scratch Pull Scratch Pull
92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute
93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open
94 A# 582A# 4Shaker
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
54
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Voice No. 188 194 195 196 197 198
MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128
Keyboard MIDI
Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit
StdKit1 +
Chinese Perc.
Note#NoteNote#Note
25 C# 013C# -1 Surdo Mute
26 D 0 14 D -1 Surdo Open
27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q
28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap
29 F 0 17 F -1 Scratch Push
30 F# 018F# -1 Scratch Pull
31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap
32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise
33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click
34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell
35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L
36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H
37 C# 125C# 0Brush Tap
38 D 1 26 D 0 Brush Swirl
39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap
40 E 1 28 E 0 Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal
41 F 1 29 F 0 Snare Roll
42 F# 130F# 0Castanet Hi Q 2
43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L
44 G# 132G# 0Sticks
45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft AnBD Dance-1 Bass Drum L
46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim
47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard AnBD Dance-2 Gran Cassa
48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Mute
49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick
50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M
51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap
52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Sn H
53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1
54 F# 242F# 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 3
55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2
56 G# 244G# 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 4
57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3
58 A# 246A# 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open 2
59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4
60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5
61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Hand Cym. L
62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6
63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L
64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal
65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup
66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine
67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal
68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell
69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cym. H
70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap
71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H
72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H
73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L
74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H
75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M
76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L
77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H
78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L
79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Dagu Mute
80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L
Zhongcha Mute
81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa
Dagu Heavy
82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas
Zhongcha Open
83 B 4 71 B 3 Samba Whistle H
Paigu Middle
84 C 5 72 C 4 Samba Whistle L
Paigu Low
85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short
Xiaocha Mute
86 D 5 74 D 4 Guiro Long
Bangu
87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Analog Claves
Xiaocha Open
88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H
Bangzi
89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L
Muyu Low
90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push
Zhongluo Mute
91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull
Muyu Mid-Low
92 G# 580G# 4 Triangle Mute
Zhongluo Open
93 A 5 81 A 4 Triangle Open
Muyu Middle
94 A# 582A# 4Shaker
Xiaoluo Open
95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell
Triangle Mute
96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree
Triangle Open
97 C# 685C# 5
98 D 6 86 D 5
99 D# 687D# 5
100 E 6 88 E 5
101 F 6 89 F 5
102 F# 690F# 5
103 G 6 91 G 5
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C1
D#1
D1
C#1
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C2
D#2
D2
C#2
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C3
D#3
D3
C#3
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C4
D#4
D4
C#4
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C5
D#5
D5
C#5
C6
Drum Kit List
55
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
199 200 201 202 203 204 205
126/000/040 126/000/0115 126/000/037 126/000/041 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113
Indian Kit 1 Indian Kit 2 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit
Zarb Back mf
Zarb Tom f
Indian Hand Clap Zarb Eshareh
Dafli Open Zarb Whipping
Da f l i S l a p Tom b a k To m f
Dafli Rim Neghareh Tom f
Duff Open Tombak Back f
Duff Slap Neghareh Back f
Duff Rim Tombak Snap f
Hateli Long Hatheli Long Neghareh Pelang f Conga H Tip
Hateli Short Hatheli Short Tombak Trill Conga H Heel
Baya ge Baya ge Khaligi Clap 1 Conga H Open
Drum Loop
Baya ke Baya ke Arabic Zalgouta Open Conga H Mute
Baya ghe Baya ghe Khaligi Clap 2 Conga H Slap Open
Baya ka Baya ka Arabic Zalgouta Close Conga H Slap
Tabla na Tabla na Arabic Hand Clap Conga H Slap Mute
Tabla tin Tabla tin Tabel Tak 1 Conga L Tip
Tablabaya dha Tablabaya dha Sagat 1 Conga L Heel
Tabla tun Dhol 1 Open Tabel Dom Conga L Open
Tablabaya dhin Dhol 1 Slap Sagat 2 Conga L Mute
Tabla di Dhol 1 Mute Tabel Tak 2 Conga L Slap Open
Tablabaya dhe Dhol 1 Open Slap Sagat 3 Conga L Slap
Tabla ti Dhol 1 Roll Riq Tik 3 Conga L Slide
Tabla ne Dandia Short Riq Tik 2 Bongo H Open 1 finger Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat
Tabla taran Dandia Long Riq Tik Hard 1 Bongo H Open 3 finger Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps
Tabla tak Chutki Riq Tik 1 Bongo H Rim Door Slam Door Squeak
Chipri Chipri Riq Tik Hard 2 Bongo H Tip String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam
Kanjira Open Khanjira Open Riq Tik Hard 3 Bongo H Heel Scratch Applause
Kanjira Slap Khanjira Slap Riq Tish Bongo H Slap Wind Chime Camera
Kanjira Mute Khanjira Mute Riq Snouj 2 Bongo L Open 1 finger Telephone Ring 2 Horn
Kanjira Bend up Khanjira Bendup Riq Roll Bongo L Open 3 finger Hiccup
Kanjira Bend down Khanjira Benddown Riq Snouj 1 Bongo L Rim Cuckoo Clock
Dholak Open Dholak 1 Open Riq Sak Bongo L Tip Stream
Dholak Mute Dholak 1 Mute Riq Snouj 3 Bongo L Heel Frog
Dholak Slap Dholak 1 Slap Riq Snouj 4 Bongo L Slap Rooster
Dhol Open Dhol 2 Open Riq Tak 1 Timbale L Open Dog
Dhol Mute Dhol 2 Slap Riq Brass 1 Cat
Dhol Slap Dhol 2 Rim Riq Tak 2 Owl
Dhol Slide Mridangam na Riq Brass 2 Horse Gallop
Mridangam Normal Mridangam din Riq Dom Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh
Mridangam Open Mridangam ki Katem Tak Doff Paila L Car Tires Squeal Cow
Mridangam Mute Mridangam ta Katem Dom Timbale H Open Car Passing Lion
Mridangam Slap Mridangam Chapu Katem Sak 1 Car Crash Scratch
Mridangam Rim Mridangam Lo Closed Katem Tak 1 Siren Yo!
Chimta Open Mridangam Lo Open Katem Sak 2 Train Go!
Chimta Normal Chimta Normal Katem Tak 2 Jet Plane Get up!
Chimta Ring Chimta Ring Daholla Sak 2 Paila H Starship Whoow!
Dholki Open Dholki Hi Open Daholla Sak 1 Cowbell Top Burst
Huuaah!
Dholki Mute Dholki Hi Mute Daholla Tak 1 Roller Coaster
Dholki Slap Dholki Lo Open Daholla Dom Submarine
Dholki Slide Dholki Hi Slap Daholla Tak 2
Dholki Rim Dholki Lo Slide Tablah Prok Guiro Short
Khol Open Khol Open Tablah Dom 2 Guiro Long
Khol Slide Khol slide Tablah Roll of Edge
Khol Mute Khol Mute Tablah Tak Finger 4
Manjira Open Manjira Open Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tambourine Shower Laugh
Manjira Close Manjira Close Tablah Tak Finger 3 Thunder Scream
Jhanji Open Jhanji Open Tablah Tak Trill 2 Wind Punch
Jhanji Close Jhanji Close Tablah Tak Finger 2 Stream Heartbeat
Mondira Open Mondira Open Tablah Tak Finger 1 Maracas Bubble Footsteps
Uh!+Hit
Mondira Close Mondira Close Tablah Tik 2 Shaker Feed
Mridang Open Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Tablah Tik 4 Cabasa
Mridang Mute Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Tablah Tik 3
Mridang Rim Indian Bhangra Scat 3 Tablah Tik 1
Mridang Slide indian Bhangra Scat 4 Tablah Tak 3
Khomokh Normal Khomokh Normal Tablah Tak 1
Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mute Tablah Tak 4
Khomokh Mltatk Khomokh mltatk Tablah Tak 2
Madal-A2 Thavil Open Tablah Sak 2
Madal-A#2 Thavil Slap Tablah Tremolo
Madal-B2 Thavil Mute Tablah Sak 1
Madal-C3 Khartaal Tablah Dom 1 Dog Machine Gun
Madal-C#3 Dholak 2 Open Horse Laser Gun Applause 1
Madal-D3 Dholak 2 Slide Bird Tweet 2 Explosion Applause 2
Madal-D#3 Dholak 2 Rim 1 Firework Applause 3
Madal-E3 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Applause 4
Madal-F3 Dholak 2 Ring
Madal-F#3 Dholak 2 Slap
Madal-G3 Maou
* Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below.
56
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Song List
Song No. Song Name
Top Picks
001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)
002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)
003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)
Learn to Play
004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)
007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)
008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)
009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)
010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)
011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)
012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)
013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)
014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)
015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)
016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)
017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)
018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)
019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)
Favorite
020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)
021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)
022 Aura Lee (Traditional)
023 London Bridge (Traditional)
024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)
025 Nedelka (Traditional)
026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)
027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)
028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)
029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)
030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)
031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)
032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)
033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)
034 Greensleeves (Traditional)
035 Kalinka (Traditional)
036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)
037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)
038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)
039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)
040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)
041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)
042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)
043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)
044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)
045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)
046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)
047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)
048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)
049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)
050
Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvo
ř
ák)
Favorite with Style
051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)
052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)
053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)
054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)
055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)
056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)
057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)
058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)
059 Red River Valley (Traditional)
060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)
061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)
062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)
063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)
064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)
065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)
066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)
067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)
068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)
069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)
070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)
Instrument Master
071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)
072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)
074
Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)
075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)
076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)
077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)
078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)
079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)
Piano Repertoire
080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)
081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)
082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)
083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)
084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)
085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)
086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)
087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)
088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)
089
Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)
090
Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)
091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)
092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)
093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)
094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)
095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)
096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)
097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)
098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)
099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)
100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)
101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)
102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)
Song No. Song Name
• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.
• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete
the user registration at the following website.
https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/
57
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Style List
Style No. Style Name
8BEAT
1BritPopRock
2 8BeatModern
3 Cool8Beat
4 60sGtrPop
5 8BeatAdria
6 60s8Beat
7 8Beat
8 OffBeat
960sRock
10 HardRock
11 RockShuffle
12 8BeatRock
16BEAT
13 16Beat
14 PopShuffle
15 GuitarPop
16 16BtUptempo
17 KoolShuffle
18 HipHopLight
BALLAD
19 70sGlamPiano
20 PianoBallad
21 LoveSong
22 6/8ModernEP
23 6/8SlowRock
24 OrganBallad
25 PopBallad
26 16BeatBallad
DANCE
27 ClubBeat
28 Electronica
29 FunkyHouse
30 MellowHipHop
31 Chillout
32 EuroTrance
33 Ibiza
34 SwingHouse
35 Clubdance
36 ClubLatin
37 Garage1
38 Garage2
39 TechnoParty
40 UKPop
41 HipHopGroove
42 HipShuffle
43 HipHopPop
DISCO
44 ModernDisco
45 70sDisco
46 LatinDisco
47 SaturdayNight
48 DiscoHands
SWING&JAZZ
49 BigBandFast
50 BigBandBallad
51 AcousticJazz
52 AcidJazz
53 JazzClub
54 Swing1
55 Swing2
56 Five/Four
57 Dixieland
58 Ragtime
R&B
59 BluesRock
60 Soul
61 DetroitPop
62 60sRock&Roll
63 6/8Soul
64 CrocoTwist
65 Rock&Roll
66 ComboBoogie
67 6/8Blues
COUNTRY
68 CountryPop
69 CountrySwing
70 Country2/4
71 Bluegrass
LATIN
72 BrazilianSamba
73 BossaNova
74 Forro
75 Sertanejo
76 Tijuana
77 Joropo
78 Parranda
79 Reggaeton
80 Mambo
81 Salsa
82 Beguine
83 Reggae
BALLROOM
84 VienneseWaltz
85 EnglishWaltz
86 Slowfox
87 Foxtrot
88 Quickstep
89 Tango
90 Pasodoble
91 Samba
92 ChaChaCha
Style No. Style Name
93 Rumba
94 Jive
TRAD&WORLD
95 USMarch
96 6/8March
97 GermanMarch
98 PolkaPop
99 OberPolka
100 Tarantella
101 Showtune
102 ChristmasSwing
103 ChristmasWaltz
104 ScottishReel
105 Duranguense
106 CumbiaGrupera
107 Yi Zu Min Ge
108 Jing Ju Jie Zou
109 Bhajan
110 B ol ly Mi x
111 IndianPop
112 Bhangra
113 Dandiya
114 ModernDangdut
115 Keroncong
116 Saeidy
117 WehdaSaghira
118 Iranian Elec
119 E ma ra ti
WALTZ
120 SwingWaltz
121 JazzWaltz
122 CountryWaltz
123 OberWalzer
124 Musette
CHILDREN
125 Learning2/4
126 Learning4/4
127 Learning6/8
PIANIST
128 Stride
129 PianoSwing
130 PianoBoogie
131 Arpeggio
132 Habanera
133 SlowRock
134 8BeatPianoBallad
135 6/8PianoMarch
136 PianoWaltz
Style No. Style Name
58
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Music Database List
MDB No. MDB Name
POP
1AlvFever
2DayPdise
3 GoMyWay
4 HowDeep!
5 HurryLuv
6 Imagine
7JustCall
8 SultanSw
9WhitePle
10 YesterPf
ROCK
11 JumpRock
12 PickUpPc
13 RdRiverR
14 SatsfyGt
15 Sheriff
16 SmokeWtr
17 TwistAgn
18 VenusPop
DANCE
19 2 of Us
20 B Leave
21 Back St
22 Crockett
23 FunkyTwn
24 KillSoft
25 Nine PM
26 SingBack
27 StrandD
BALLAD
28 AdelineB
29 CatMemry
30 ElvGhett
31 Feeling
32 Mn Rivr
33 OnMyMnd
34 OverRbow
35 ReleseMe
36 SavingLv
37 SmokyEye
38 WhisprSx
R & B
39 AmazingG
40 BoogiePf
41 Clock Rk
42 CU later
43 HappyDay
44 RisingSn
45 ShookUp
46 TeddyBer
SWING & JAZZ
47 ChooChoo
48 HighMoon
49 InMood
50 MistySax
51 MoonLit
52 New York
53 SaintMch
54 ShearJz
55 TstHoney
56 USPatrol
EASY LISTENING
57 Close2U
58 Entrtain
59 LuvStory
60 MyPrince
61 PupetStr
62 Raindrop
63 R'ticGtr
64 SingRain
65 SmallWld
66 SpkSoft
67 StrangeN
68 TimeGoes
69 WhteXmas
70 WishStar
71 WondrWld
LATIN
72 BambaLa
73 BeHappy!
74 CopaLola
75 DayNight
76 Ipanema
77 MuchoTrp
78 Sunshine
79 Tico Org
80 TrbWave
COUNTRY
81 BoxerFlt
82 CntryRds
83 Jambala
84 TopWorld
85 YlwRose
BALLROOM
86 BrazilBr
87 CherryTp
88 DanubeWv
89 TangoAc
90 Tea4Two
TRADITIONAL
91 CampRace
92 CielPari
93 GrndClok
94 JinglBel
95 MickMrch
MDB No. MDB Name
96 Showbiz
97 StarMrch
98 WashPost
99 XmasWalz
100 YankDood
MDB No. MDB Name
59
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Effect Type List
Harmony Types
Reverb Types
Chorus Types
No. Harmony Type Description
01 Duet
If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while
playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three
notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that
includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.
02 Trio
03 Block
04 Country
05 Octave
06 Trill 1/4 note
If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.
07 Trill 1/6 note
08 Trill 1/8 note
09 Trill 1/12 note
10 Trill 1/16 note
11 Trill 1/24 note
12 Trill 1/32 note
13 Tremolo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.
(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)
14 Tremolo 1/6 note
15 Tremolo 1/8 note
16 Tremolo 1/12 note
17 Tremolo 1/16 note
18 Tremolo 1/24 note
19 Tremolo 1/32 note
20 Echo 1/4 note
If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.
(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)
21 Echo 1/6 note
22 Echo 1/8 note
23 Echo 1/12 note
24 Echo 1/16 note
25 Echo 1/24 note
26 Echo 1/32 note
No. Reverb Type Description
01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.
04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.
06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.
08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.
10 Off No effect.
No. Chorus Type Description
01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.
03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.
05 Off No effect.
60
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
Specifications
* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify
products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please
check with your Yamaha dealer.
Size/Weight
Dimensions (W x D x H) 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”)
Weight 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.)
Keyboard
Number of Keys 61
Touch Response Yes
Display
Display LCD display
Backlight Yes
Language English
Voices
Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling
Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32
Preset Number of Voices 187 panel Voices + 18 drum/SFX kits + 345 XGlite Voices
Compatibility GM/XGlite
Effects
Types
Reverb 9 types
Chorus 4 types
Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types
Master EQ 6 types
Harmony 26 types
Functions
Melody Suppressor Yes
Dual Yes
Split Yes
Panel Sustain Yes
Accompaniment
Styles
Preset
Number of Preset Styles 136
Fingering Multi finger
Style Control
ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,
MAIN/AUTO FILL
External Styles Yes
Other Features
Music Database 100
One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes
Recording/Playback
Preset Number of Preset Songs 102
Recording
Number of Songs 5
Number of Tracks 2
Data Capacity
Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)
Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded)
Compatible Data
Format
Playback SMF Formats 0 & 1
Recording Original File Format
Function
Lesson/Guide
[KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING],
[PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY]
Registration Number of Buttons 9
Overall
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 11–280
Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12
Tuning 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments)
Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes
Memory/
Connectivity
Memory Internal Memory Approx. 1.7MB
Connectivity
USB TO HOST Yes
DC IN DC IN 12V
Headphones/Output [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1
Sustain Pedal [SUSTAIN] x 1
AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Yes
Amplifiers/Speakers
Amplifiers 2.5W+2.5W
Speakers 12cm×2
Power Supply
Power Supply
Adaptor
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
Batteries
Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable
batteries
Power Consumption 8W (When using PA-130 power adaptor)
Auto Power Off Function Yes
Accessories
Included Accessories
•Music Rest
• Owner’s Manual
• AC Power adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha)
• Online Member Product Registration
* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please
check with your Yamaha dealer.
Optional Accessories
• AC Power Adaptor:
Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by
Yamaha
Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent
• Keyboard Stand: L-2C
• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30
• Footswitch: FC4/FC5
• USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1)
PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual
61
Index
A
A-B Repeat ................................... 24
AC Power Adaptor ...................... 10
ACMP ........................................... 17
audio device ................................. 25
Auto Accompaniment ................. 17
AUTO FILL ................................. 19
Auto Power Off ...................... 12, 35
AUX IN .................................... 9, 25
AUX IN Volume .......................... 33
B
Backup .......................................... 36
Backup Clear ............................... 36
Backup Parameter ........................ 36
battery ........................................... 10
Battery Type ................................. 35
Beat ............................................... 13
BGM ............................................. 23
C
Chord ............................................ 13
Chord Dictionary ......................... 21
Chord Type ................................... 20
Chorus .......................................... 16
Chorus Type ........................... 34, 59
computer ....................................... 36
Computer-related Operations .......4
D
Demo ............................................ 22
Demo Group ................................ 35
Demo Play Mode ......................... 35
Display ......................................... 13
Drum Kit List ............................... 53
Dual Voice .............................. 15, 34
E
Effect ...................................... 16, 34
Effect Type List ........................... 59
ENDING ......................................19
EQ Setting ....................................12
EQ type ......................................... 12
External Clock ............................. 34
F
Fast Forward ................................23
Fast Reverse ................................. 23
Flash Clear ................................... 36
Footswitch .................................... 11
Function ........................................ 33
Function List ................................ 33
G
GM System Level 1 ....................... 4
Grade ............................................28
Grand Piano ................................. 14
H
Harmony .......................................16
Harmony Type ........................16, 34
Harmony Volume ...................16, 34
Headphone ....................................11
I
Initial Send ...................................34
Initialization .................................36
INTRO ..........................................19
iPad ................................................36
iPhone ...........................................36
iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ..4
i-UX1 ............................................36
K
Keyboard Display ........................13
Keys To Success ...........................26
L
Lesson ...........................................26
Listening .................................26, 28
Local Control ...............................34
M
MAIN ............................................19
Main Voice .............................14, 34
Master EQ Type ...........................34
MASTER VOLUME ...................11
Measure ........................................13
Melody Suppressor ......................25
Metronome ...................................14
Metronome Volume ...............14, 34
MIDI Basics ...................................4
MIDI Reference .............................4
Music Database ............................18
Music Database List ....................58
Music Rest ................................4, 11
Musicsoft Downloader ................18
N
Notation ........................................13
O
One Touch Setting .......................14
P
Part ................................................24
Passing Status ...............................27
Pause .............................................23
PC Mode .................................34, 35
Phrase Repeat .........................26, 29
Power Requirements ....................10
R
Random .........................................23
Recording .....................................30
Recording Data Capacity ............30
Registration Memory ...................32
Reverb .......................................... 16
Reverb Level ................................ 34
Reverb Type ........................... 34, 59
rhythm .......................................... 17
rit. .................................................. 19
S
Section .......................................... 19
Song .............................................. 22
Song Book ............................... 4, 26
Song Book Sample ...................... 38
Song Category ............................. 22
Song List ...................................... 56
Song Volume .......................... 22, 33
Specifications ............................... 60
Split .............................................. 15
Split Point ........................ 15, 17, 33
Split Voice .............................. 15, 34
Style .............................................. 17
STYLE FILE ................................. 4
Style List ...................................... 57
Style Register ............................... 33
Style Volume .......................... 17, 33
Sustain .................................... 16, 34
Synchro Start ............................... 17
T
Tap ................................................ 19
Tempo ..................................... 14, 19
Time Signature ...................... 14, 34
Timing .................................... 26, 28
Touch Response ............................. 4
Touch Sensitivity ................... 12, 33
Track ............................................. 30
Transpose ..................................... 33
Troubleshooting ........................... 37
Tuning .......................................... 33
U
Ultra-Wide Stereo ....................... 15
USB ................................................ 4
USB TO HOST ............................. 9
User Song ..................................... 30
V
Vo i c e ............................................. 14
Voice List ..................................... 48
W
Waiting ................................... 26, 28
Wide Type .................................... 34
X
XGlite ............................................. 4
Y
Your Tempo ................................. 35
62
LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON
PORTABLE KEYBOARDS
(NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)
Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free
performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every
Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the
Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s
authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted
Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or
Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.
Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or
otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or
materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If
Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or
removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay
the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)
damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to
follow instructions according to the Owners Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the
carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been
altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)
deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)
damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/
noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of
alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original
Owner and is not transferable.
In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted
Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact
Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local
authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer
has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website
at www.Yamaha.com
. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of
the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase
document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found
ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon
receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.
Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER
EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.
YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT
YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to
state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to
assume for it any other express warranty.
If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:
CUSTOMER SERVICE
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373
Telephone: 800-854-1569
www.yamaha.com
Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.
©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America.
(US only)
63
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous gurant dans la liste suivante.
Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o
representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor
autorizado relacionado a seguir.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más
cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного
представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного
дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha De México, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”,
Col. San José Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juárez,
03900, México, D.F.
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germa
ny
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 044-387-8080
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/
ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Ofce)
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Poland Ofce
ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland
Tel: 022-500-2925
BULGARIA
Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.
Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa
1528 Soa, Bulgaria
Tel: 02-978-20-25
MALTA
Olimpus Music Ltd.
The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida
MSD06
Tel: 02133-2144
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Music Europe
7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest,
77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal
en España
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany lial
Scandinavia
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – lial
Denmark
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -
Norwegian Branch
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector
47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-485-3300
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED
Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,
Singapore 530202, Singapore
Tel: 6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th oor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacic Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2313
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
DMI6
Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/
Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/
ZE42920
© 2012-2014 Yamaha Corporation
Published 04/2014 PO##*.*-**B0
C.S,G., DMI Development Division
Printed in China

Documenttranscriptie

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 2 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en_01) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E343/YPT-340 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom_en_01) PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 3 About the Manuals In addition to this Owner’s Manual, the following Online materials (PDF files) are available. MIDI Reference Contains MIDI-related information, such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about what MIDI is and can do. Computer-related Operations Contains instructions about computer-related functions. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such iPhone, iPad, etc. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter “PSR-E343” (for example) to the Model Name box, then click [SEARCH]. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Demo Songs) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet (“Online Member Product Registration”) packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • AC Power Adaptor*1 • Music Rest • Online Member Product Registration*2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Formats and functions GM System Level 1 USB “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GMcompatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). XGlite The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 4 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual STYLE FILE Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature gives you maximum expressive control over the level of the Voices. Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Contents About the Manuals................................................ 4 Included Accessories............................................ 4 Formats and functions .......................................... 4 Setting Up Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up 8 10 13 Display Items ...................................................... 13 Basic Operations ................................................ 13 Reference Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14 Selecting a Main Voice ....................................... 14 Playing the “Grand Piano” .................................. 14 Using the Metronome ......................................... 14 Layering a Dual Voice ........................................ 15 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ........ 15 Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15 Adding Harmony................................................. 16 Applying Effects to the Sound ............................ 16 Playing Styles 17 Using the Music Database.................................. 18 Registering a Style File....................................... 18 Style Variations—Sections ................................. 19 Changing the Tempo .......................................... 19 Chord Types for Style Playback ......................... 20 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary. 21 Playing Songs Using the Melody Suppressor .............................25 Using the Song Lesson Feature Power Requirements .......................................... 10 Using the music rest ........................................... 11 Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment .. 11 Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack .. 11 Turning the Power On/Off................................... 11 Auto Power Off Function .................................... 12 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound....... 12 Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard 12 Display Items and Basic Operations Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers 25 22 Listening to a Demo Song .................................. 22 Selecting and Playing Back a Song.................... 22 BGM Playback.................................................... 23 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 23 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 23 A-B Repeat ......................................................... 24 Turning Each Part On/Off ................................... 24 26 Downloading the Song Book............................... 26 Keys To Success ................................................26 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................28 Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting.29 Phrase Repeat .................................................... 29 Recording Your Performance 30 Track Structure of a Song ...................................30 Quick Recording..................................................30 Recording to a Specified Track ...........................31 Clearing a User Song..........................................31 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 32 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory ..32 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ..32 The Functions 33 Using with a Computer or iPad/iPhone 36 Connecting to a computer ...................................36 Connecting an iPad/iPhone.................................36 Backup and Initialization 36 Backup Parameters.............................................36 Initialization .........................................................36 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 37 Song Book Sample ........................................ 38 Voice List ........................................................ 48 Drum Kit List .................................................. 53 Song List......................................................... 56 Style List ......................................................... 57 Music Database List ...................................... 58 Effect Type List .............................................. 59 Specifications................................................. 60 Index................................................................ 61 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 5 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Follow the precautions below. Failure to do so might result in explosion, fire, overheating or battery fluid leakage. - Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. - Do not dispose of batteries in fire. - Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not designed to be charged. • Use the specified adaptor (page 60) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. - Keep the batteries separate from metallic objects such as necklaces, hairpins, coins, and keys. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. - Use the specified battery type (page 10) only. - Use new batteries, all of which are the same type, same model, and made by the same manufacturer. Do not open - Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. - When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument. - When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Keep batteries away from small children who might accidentally swallow them. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. Fire warning - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. DMI-5 6 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 1/2 • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Handling caution • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer. (page 36) Information  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. DMI-5 2/2 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 7 Panel Controls and Terminals Setting Up Front Panel Song List (page 56) Style List (page 57) Display (page 13) q w e r i t y o !1 !2 !3 !4 q w e r t y [ ] (Standby/On) switch ..................... page 11 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 11 [DEMO] button......................................page 23 [FUNCTION] button ..............................page 33 [METRONOME] button......................... page 14 [TEMPO/TAP] button............................ page 19 In the Song mode u PART [L] button ..............................................page 28 [R] button ..............................................page 28 In the Recording mode u [REC TRACK 2] button.........................page 30 [REC TRACK 1] button.........................page 30 The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. 8 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual C2 GrandPno 001 !0 u C1 001 !5 !6 C3 i [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button .............. page 26 o [PHRASE REPEAT] button .................. page 29 !0 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button ............................................................... page 28 In the Song mode !1 [A-B REPEAT] button........................... page 24 !2 [REW] button ........................................ page 23 !3 [FF] button ............................................ page 23 !4 [PAUSE] button .................................... page 23 In the Style mode !1 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ....................... page 17 !2 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button................. page 19 !3 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.................... page 19 !4 [SYNC START] button .......................... page 17 !7 !8 !9 @1 C4 @2 Panel Controls and Terminals Rear Panel Voice List (page 48) Music Database List (page 58) #0 @0 #2 @5 @6 @7 @8 #3 @3 #1 #4 @4 @9 C5 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9 C6 [START/STOP] button...................pages 17, 22 [REC] button ........................................ page 30 [SONG] button ..................................... page 22 [VOICE] button......................................page 14 [STYLE] button .....................................page 17 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]............page 13 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ...............page 14 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button...........page 15 [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button ....... page 25 [REGIST MEMORY] button.................. page 32 [MUSIC DATABASE] button .................page 18 [DUAL] button .......................................page 15 [SPLIT] button.......................................page 15 [HARMONY] button ..............................page 16 Drum illustrations for the Drum Kit ....page 14 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 SUSTAIN jack........................................ page 11 USB TO HOST terminal* ......................page 36 AUX IN jack ...........................................page 25 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ........................ page 11 DC IN jack .............................................page 10 * For connecting to a computer. For details, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 4) on the website. When connecting, use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. Each of these indicates the drum or percussion instrument assigned to the corresponding key for “Standard Kit 1.” PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up  Installing the batteries Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (display is blank, except for notation staff). 2 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. Using an AC Power Adaptor 1 Make sure that the power of the instrument is off (the backlight display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 60) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 3 Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. 2 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. 4 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Connecting or disconnecting the power adaptor with batteries installed may turn the power off, resulting in loss of data being recorded or transferred at the time. 2 AC power adaptor 3 AC outlet When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries with new ones or already-recharged ones. NOTE Using Batteries This instrument requires six “AA” size, Alkaline (LR6)/Manganese (R6) batteries, or rechargeable nickel-metal hydride batteries (rechargeable Ni-MH batteries). The Alkaline batteries or rechargeable NiMH batteries are recommended for this instrument, since other types may result in poorer battery performance. WARNING • When using Ni-MH batteries, follow the instructions that came with the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. 10 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual • This instrument cannot charge the batteries. Use only the specified charger device when charging. • Power will be automatically drawn from the AC adaptor if an AC adaptor is connected while batteries are installed in the instrument. Setting Up  Setting the battery type After installing new batteries and turning the power on, make sure to set the Battery Type appropriately (rechargeable or not) via Function number 042 (page 35). NOTICE • Failure to set the Battery Type may shorten the amount of the battery life. Make sure to set the Battery Type correctly. NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Connecting a Footswitch to the SUSTAIN jack Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. You can produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional Footswitch plugged into the [SUSTAIN] jack. NOTE • The sustain function does not affect split voices (page 15). • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Turning the Power On/Off Any pair of stereo headphones with a 1/4” stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. Turn down the [MASTER VOLUME] control to “MIN” then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] control. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. While playing the keyboard, use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. CAUTION CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, set all volume levels to the minimum, then turn off the power for all components. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Auto Power Off Function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes.  To disable the Auto Power Off function: Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Six different master equalizer (EQ) settings give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key. Hold down the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second to call up “024 MasterEQ.” “MasterEQ” is shown in the display for a few seconds, and the current Master EQ type appears. MasterEQ 024 Hold for longer than a second.  To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: 1 While holding down the [FUNCTION] button, press the [+] or [-] button several times until “AutoOff” (Function 041) appears then select the desired value. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (minutes) Default value: 30 (minutes) NOTE • Generally, the data and settings are maintained even when the power is turned off. For details, see page 36. NOTICE • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. Speaker 024 Current Master EQ type 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select the desired Master EQ type. Master EQ types 1 Speaker Optimum for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. 2 Headphone Optimum for headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 3 Boost Features more powerful sound. 4 Piano Optimum for piano solo performance. 5 Bright Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. 6 Mild Lowers the high range for a softer sound. Changing the Touch Sensitivity of the Keyboard You can specify the Touch Sensitivity (how the sound responds to your playing strength). This can be set via Function number 007 (page 33). 12 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Display Items and Basic Operations Display Items Song/Voice/Style Lesson Indication These indicate the operating condition of the instrument. On/Off status This area indicates the lesson related status. This area indicates the on/off status of each function. Each indication is shown when the corresponding function is turned on. Indicates that Keys To Success (page 26) is on. ... Page 12 Indicates that Phrase Repeat (page 29) is on. Notation Normally this indicates the notes you play. When the Song Lesson function is used, this indicates the current notes and chord of playback. When the Dictionary function (page 21) is used, this indicates the notes of the chord you specify. 001 NOTE • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va.” • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown, due to space limitations in the display. ... Page 17 ... Page 15 ... Page 15 ... Page 16 GrandPno 003 Chord Song Track status Indicates the chord which is played on the Auto Accompaniment range (page 17) of the keyboard, or specified via Song playback. Measure or Function Normally indicates the current measure number of current Style or Song. When the [FUNCTION] button (page 33) is in use, this indicates the Function number. 003 ... Page 15 Indicates the Passing Status (page 27) of the Keys To Success lesson. Indicates the on/off status of Song playback or target Track of Song recording. Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track 027 Keyboard Display Beat Indicates the current beat of playback. Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Basic Operations Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values.  Number buttons  [-] and [+] buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter an item or value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Example: Selecting Voice 003, Harpsichord. Press number buttons [0], [0], [3], or simply press [3]. Press briefly to decrease. Press briefly to increase. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 13 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Reference In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects—giving you a wide variety of musical sounds. Selecting a Main Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The Voice number and name will be shown. Playing the “Grand Piano” When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Voice number 001 GrandPno Appears after the [VOICE] button is pressed. Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Using the Metronome 2 Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] buttons to select the desired Voice. Refer to the Voice List on page 48. 095 Flute The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. 2 Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome. Select 095 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. To change the tempo: Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Preset Voice Types 001–187 Instrument Voices (including sound effects). 188–205 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 53. 206–550 XGlite Voices 000 One Touch Setting (OTS) The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. To set the Time Signature: Press and hold the [METRONOME] button to call up “TimeSigN” (Functions 032; page 34), then use the Number buttons. To set the Metronome Volume: This can be set via Function number 034 (page 34). 14 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Split Point ... default setting: 54 (F#2) Layering a Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 36 Press the [DUAL] button to turn Dual on. 001 2 Press the [DUAL] button again to exit from Dual. To select a different Dual Voice: Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice by pressing and holding the [Dual] button to call up “D.Voice” (Function 012; page 34), then using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area 84 Main Voice and Dual Voice Press the [SPLIT] button again to exit from Split. To select a different Split Voice: Press and hold the [Split] button to call up “S.Voice” (Function 016; page 34), then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Playing with enhanced, more spacious sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo) You can play the keyboard with a spacious, wider sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers by turning on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect. 1 By dividing the keyboard into the two separate areas, you can play a different Voice between the Left hand and Right hand areas. 1 72 You can play a “Split Voice” on the Left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the Right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the Left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” (Function 006; page 33) which can be changed from the default F#2 key. Appears when dual voice is on 2 60 Split Voice GrandPno Two voices will sound at the same time. 48 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to turn it on. 001 Press the [SPLIT] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the Left hand and Right hand areas. GrandPno Appears when UltraWide Stereo is on. The sound will expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. 001 GrandPno Appears when split voice is on 2 Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again to turn it off. To select the Ultra-Wide Stereo type: Press and hold the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button to call up “Wide” (Function 025; page 34), then use the Number buttons. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 15 Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony How to sound each Harmony Type You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. If you don’t want to have a Harmony effect or harmony notes, press the [HARMONY] button again to turn Harmony off. 001 • Harmony type 01 to 05 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 17). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) GrandPno Hold down two keys. • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) This icon appears when the [HARMONY] button is pressed. Although turning on the Harmony will select a Harmony Type suitable for the current Main Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second until “HarmType” (Functions 026; page 34) appears on the display. After “HarmType” is shown for a few seconds, the current Harmony Type appears. HarmType Hold for longer than a second. 02 Trio Current Harmony Type 3 16 Press the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Harmony Type. For details, refer to the Harmony Type list on page 59. The effect and operation differs depending on the Harmony Type. Refer to the section on the right side. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) Play the keys. To adjust the Harmony Volume: This can be adjusted via Function number 027 (page 34). Applying Effects to the Sound This instrument can apply various Effects as listed below to the instrument’s sound. Reverb Adds the ambience of a club or concert hall to the sound. Although the best-suited Reverb type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 020 (page 34). You can also set the Reverb depth via Function number 021 (page 34). Chorus Makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Although the best-suited Chorus type is called up by selecting a Song or Style, you can select another one via Function number 022 (page 34). Sustain By turning on the Sustain parameter of Function number 023 (page 34), you can add a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. Sustain can also be applied with the optional footswitch (page 11). Playing Styles This instrument includes the Auto Accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment). You can select from a huge variety of Styles covering a wide range of musical genres. 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Style. The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the Style List (page 57). 4 Style Number 002 Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start playback. Play a melody with the right hand and chords with the left hand. For information about chords, refer to “Chord Types for Style Playback” (page 20) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 21). 8BtModrn Split Point Style Name This icon appears when the [STYLE] button is pressed. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. 021 With this operation, the area of the keyboard to the left of the Split Point (54: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. Split Point ... default setting: 54 (F#2) 60 48 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. LoveSong This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. 36 5 72 You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 19. To play back the rhythm part only If you press the [START/STOP] button (without pressing the [ACMP ON/OFF] button in step 2), only the rhythm part can be played back, and you can play a melody performance using the entire keyboard range. NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (128–136) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. Auto Accompaniment range The highest key for the Auto Accompaniment range is referred to as the “Split Point,” which can be changed from the default of F#2 via Function number 006 (page 33). 3 Adjusting the Style Volume To adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Style Volume. This can be set via Function number 001 (page 33). Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. 021 LoveSong Flashes when sync start is on. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 17 Playing Styles Using the Music Database If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, just selecting the favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. 001 2 3 Registering a Style File In addition to the Preset Styles, you can register an external Style file (“.sty” file transferred from a computer) as Style number 137 which will be used in the same way as the Preset Styles. 1 Transfer the Style file (***.sty) from a computer to this instrument by using Musicsoft Downloader. For instructions, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 4) on the website. You can transfer two or more Styles to this instrument although only a single Style can be registered to Style number 137. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “StyleReg” (Function 008; page 33) appears. AlvFever Use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the desired Music Database. This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. The Music Database List is provided on the front panel, or in the Music Database List (page 58). StyleReg Play the keyboard as described in Steps 4–5 on page 17. 008 After about two seconds, a registerable Style file name will appear in the display. 18 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 3 If necessary, select the desired Style by using the [+] or [-] button. 4 Press the [0] button. A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. 5 Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. Playing Styles Style Variations—Sections 7 Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. These instructions cover a typical example for using the Sections. After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the Song you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. FILL A≥B 8 1–3 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Same as Steps 1–3 in page 17. 4 MAIN A Current Section 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. INTRO≥A Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. 6 ENDING Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Changing the Tempo Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the [-] and [+] buttons to adjust the Tempo value. 090 Tempo Current Tempo value Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Types for Style Playback” on page 20. Split Point Accompaniment range Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style or Song. Using the Tap function While a Song or Style is playing back, press the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the desired tempo to change the tempo. While Song or Style playback is stopped, tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button several times to start playback at the tapped tempo—four times for a 4-beat Song or Style or three times for a 3-beat Song or Style. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 19 Playing Styles Chord Types for Style Playback For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows how to play common chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. • Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. • When playing a chord which cannot be recognized by this instrument, nothing is shown on the display. In such a case, only the rhythm and bass parts will be played. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. 20 Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Playing Styles Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary Dict. 001 The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 2-2. Press the key labeled “M7” in the section between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT.” The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are conveniently shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second to call up “Dict.” “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. Dict. Chord name (root and type) This operation will divide the entire keyboard into the three ranges as illustrated below. Dict. • The range to the right of “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Root, but produces no sound. • The range between “CHORD TYPE ” and “ROOT ”: Lets you specify the Chord Type, but produces no sound. • The range to the left of “CHORD TYPE ”: Lets you play and confirm the Chord specified in the above two ranges. Keyboard playing range Chord Type range 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. Root range • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(# 11), b 5, M7b 5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b 5, 7b 5, sus2 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1. Press the “G” key in the section to the right of “ROOT ” so that the “G” is shown as the root note. 3 Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the range to the left of “CHORD TYPE .” When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 21 Playing Songs You can simply enjoy listening to the internal Songs, or use them with just about any of the functions, such as Lesson.  Song Category The Songs are organized by category as listed below. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. Songs you record yourself. Songs transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 4). Listening to a Demo Song Song number Press the [DEMO] button to play Songs in sequence. Playback will repeat continuously, starting again from the first Song (001). 004 Elise 1 Song name Appears after the [Song] button is pressed. 2 To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected Song. Selecting and Playing Back a Song 1 22 Press the [SONG] button, then use the Number buttons to select the desired Song. Refer to the Song List (page 56). PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. To change the tempo: Refer to “Changing the Tempo” on page 19. Adjusting the Song Volume To adjust the volume balance between Song playback and keyboard, you can adjust the Song Volume. This can be set via Function number 002 (page 33). Playing Songs BGM Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO] button will play back only three internal Demo Songs repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs automatically play back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. 1 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause Like the transport controls on an audio player, this instrument lets you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the Song. Fast Forward During playback, press this button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. Hold down the [DEMO] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” (Function 038; page 35) is shown in the display for a few seconds, followed by the current repeat playback target. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Use the [+] or [-] button to select a playback group. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (103–107) Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–) NOTE • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. 3 Fast Reverse During playback, press this button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Press the [DEMO] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO] button again or press the [START/STOP] button. Random Song Playback When the Demo Group (above) is set to something other than “Demo,” the playback order via the [DEMO] button can be changed between numerical order and random order. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button several times until “PlayMode” (Function 039; page 35) is called up, then select “Normal” or “Random.” Pause During playback, press this button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. NOTE • When the A-B repeat is specified, the Fast Reverse and Fast Forward will only work within the range between A and B. • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO] button. Changing the Melody Voice You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other desired Voice. 1 2 3 Select a Song. Select the desired Voice. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, and the selected Voice replaces the Song’s original melody Voice. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the changed Melody Voice. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Songs A-B Repeat Turning Each Part On/Off You can play back only a specific section of a Song repeatedly by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point) in one-measure increments. A B As indicated above the panel buttons (shown below), a Song consists of two Parts, which can be turned on or off individually by pressing the corresponding button, L or R. Repeat playback of this section 1 Start playback of the Song (page 22). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. 020 FrereJac 010 Lit: Track contains data 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. NOTE • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. 24 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data By turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off during playback, you can listen to the Part (that is turned on), or practice the other part (that is turned off) on the keyboard. NOTE • Selecting another Song will cancel the on/off status of the Parts. Playing an External Audio Device with the Built-in Speakers You can output the sound of an external audio device, such as a portable music player, with the built-in speakers of this instrument by connecting it via a cable. This lets you play the keyboard along with playback of your music player. 1 Turn off the power for both the external audio device and this instrument. 2 Connect the audio device to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. Use the cable which has the stereo-mini plug at one side for connecting to this instrument and the plug matching the output jack of the external audio device at the other side. CAUTION • Before connecting, turn off the power of both this instrument and the external audio device. Also, before turning the power on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the devices, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. NOTICE • After connecting, first turn on the power to the external audio device then to this instrument. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Using the Melody Suppressor Stereo-mini plug Audio device (Portable audio player, etc.) 3 Turn on the external audio device, then this instrument. 4 Play back the connected external audio device. The sound of the audio device is output through the speakers of this instrument. 5 Adjust the volume balance between the audio device and this instrument. In general, the volume should be adjusted on the connected audio device. When the sound of the external audio device is output through this instrument, you can cancel or lower the volume of the sound located in the center of stereo playback. Since most melody parts such as vocal are located in the center of the stereo sound, you can use the function to cancel the melody part then practice it via the keyboard. 1 Play back the connected external audio device. 2 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button to turn it on. The volume of the sound located in the center of stereo playback will be canceled or lowered. on NOTE NOTE • You can adjust the volume of the sound input via the [AUX IN] jack from the external audio device. To do this, hold down the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button for longer than a second to call up “AuxInVol” (Function 003; page 33), then adjust the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 6 Play the keyboard along with the sound of the audio device. 7 After finishing the performance, stop playback of the audio device. MelodySP • Depending on the music, the melody or vocal sound may not be canceled as expected even if the Melody Suppressor is turned on. 3 Press the [MELODY SUPPRESSOR] button again to turn it off. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 25 Using the Song Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing and then in playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ The keyboard icon, “Step 01” and lesson part (“R” or “L” or “LR”) appears on the display, indicating that you are to start this lesson from scratch. If you have already passed several Steps, the next Step number appears on the display. Downloading the Song Book To use the Song Lesson, you need the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Appears when Keys to Success is on Keys To Success Step01 In this lesson, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (with each Step) to effectively master the entire Song. 1 Prepare the Song Book. Download the Song Book from the above website, or you can refer to the scores of some Songs at the end of this manual. The amount of Steps and lesson parts (which are pre-programmed) will differ depending on the Song. For details, refer to the Song Book. Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson 4 Current Step number Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, playback of the current Step starts. NOTE • All preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs. 2 Press the [SONG] button, then select a Song for your lesson. Here, select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category, then open the corresponding page of the Song Book. Step01 001 NOTE 004 3 26 • For your practice enjoyment, a special arrangement is applied to each Song. This is why playback tempo may be slower than original. Elise 1 Press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button to engage this lesson. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 5 Practice the phrase in the current Step. Referring to the notation in the Song Book and the notes shown on the display, press the notes. Using the Song Lesson Feature 6 Confirm the evaluation in the current Step. When the current Step reaches the end, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 Confirming the Passing Status You can confirm the passing status of each Song simply by selecting a Song and each Step. When Step is selected Step01 Excellen 001 Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. A score between “0”–“59” indicates that you did not pass this Step and you should try the same Step again, which begins automatically. A score of “60”–“100” indicates that you passed this Step and you should try the next Step, which begins automatically. ✩ : Passed No information: Not yet passed When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 NOTE ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. 7 Execute Step 02, 03, 04, and so on. In the last Step of each Song, you will practice all the way through the Song. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE • Even during lesson, you can select another Step by using the [+]/[-] buttons. 8 To stop this Lesson, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed Clearing the Passing Status You can clear existing passing status entries for the entire Song or a specific Step of the Song. To clear the passing status entries of all Steps: Select the desired Song then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds, with the Keys to Success mode disabled. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. To clear the passing status entry for a specific Step: Select the desired Song, enable Keys to Success, select the desired Step, then hold down the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. A “Cleared” message will appear on the display. NOTE • This operation cannot be executed during playback. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 27 Using the Song Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting 3 Lesson 1—Listening In this Lesson, you need not play the keyboard. The model melody/chords of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and remember it well. Lesson 2—Timing In this Lesson, simply concentrate on playing the notes with the correct timing. Even if you play wrong notes, the correct notes shown in the display will sound. Press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button to start playback of the Song Lesson. After starting playback, pressing this button repeatedly will change the Lesson number from 1: LISTENING  2: TIMING  3: WAITING  off  1…. Press this button until the desired number is shown on the display. NOTE Lesson 3—Waiting In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note, and playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. • During playback, you can change the Lesson mode by pressing this button, and you can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 4 NOTE • If you want to keep a steady playback tempo maintained during Lesson 3: Waiting, set the Your Tempo parameter to OFF via the Function number 037 (page 35). 1 When Lesson playback reaches to the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. “2 Timing” and “3 Waiting” will evaluate your performance in four levels. Excellent Very Good Good OK Press the [SONG] button then select a Song for your lesson. NOTE • The Song Lesson can be applied also to the Songs (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer (page 36), but cannot be applied to the User Songs. 2 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~ After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. Press either or both the [R] and [L] buttons to select the part you want to practice. NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the selected Voice. NOTE Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson Left • The Dual or Split mode cannot be engaged during lessons. Right 5 Both-hands lesson BothHand NOTE • In this step, “No LPart” may appear, indicating that the current Song does not contain a left-hand part. 28 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Using the Song Lesson Feature Keys to Success with Listening, Timing or Waiting You can combine the Keys to Success lesson (page 26) with the Listening, Timing or Waiting lesson (page 28). 1 Enable the Keys to Success lesson. Refer to Steps 1–3 on page 26. 2 Select the desired Step via the [+]/[-] buttons, then press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select the desired lesson. The selected lesson playback starts under the Keys to Success mode. Practice the phrase of the current Step via the selected Lesson. As evaluation for each Step, just “Timing is Nice” or “Play key is Nice” appears, and the passing status is not available. 3 To return to only the Keys to Success mode, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button repeatedly to select “off.” 4 To exit from the Lesson mode, press the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. Practicing only a single Phrase During Song playback, press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to practice. The corresponding Phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Turn off the L or R part, then practice the phrase repeatedly until you are satisfied. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on P03 REPEAT Phrase number Even during repeat playback, you can select any other phrase number via the [+] or [-] button, and you can return to normal playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button again. Using Phrase Repeat with Listening, Timing or Waiting With Phrase Repeat set to On, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button once, twice or three times to start and use Lesson playback with Phrase Repeat. Pressing the same button again several times to exit from the Lesson mode stops playback and allows use of just the Phrase Repeat mode. NOTE • In this status, the evaluation function is not available. Practicing two or more Phrases Phrase Repeat You can practice a difficult phrase repeatedly by selecting a specific number of the Phrase Marks pre-programmed in the Preset Songs. You can confirm the Phrase Mark location in the Song Book (page 4). Phrase mark By setting Phrase A (as the start point) and Phrase B (as the end point), you can practice two or more Phrases repeatedly. During Phrase Repeat playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to assign the current Phrase to Phrase A. When playback reaches to the desired Phrase, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to assign Phrase B. “A-B Rep” appears on the display, and Repeat playback between Phrases A and B starts. To cancel this setting, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again. NOTE • You can set Phrases A and B also when playback is stopped by selecting the Phrase number via the [+] and [-] buttons. Repeat playback of this section • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 29 Recording Your Performance You can record up to 5 of your performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 103–107). The recorded User Songs can be played back on the instrument. Track Structure of a Song User Song Number You can record your performance to the following two tracks of a User Song individually or simultaneously. rEC User 1 001 Track 1: Your melody performance is recorded to this track. Flashes Track 2: Your melody performance, or Style playback (Chord changes and Section changes), is recorded to this track. To exit from the Record mode, press the [REC] button again to stop flashing on the display. NOTICE • If all User Songs contain recorded data, “User 1” will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in “User 1,” so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! NOTE Recording Data Capacity: A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. • ACMP cannot be turned on or off in this status while you can select another Style in this status by using the [STYLE] and Number buttons. 3 Quick Recording The operation is convenient for recording a new Song without having to specify a track. Play the keyboard to start recording. If ACMP is turned on, you can independently record just the rhythm sound of Style playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button then changing the Section (page 19). Split point 1 Make the desired settings such as Voice and Style settings. If you want to record only the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 17). If you want to record Style playback as well as melody performance, turn ACMP on (page 17). 2 Press the [REC] button to enable the Record mode. On the display, the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (“User 1”–“User 5”) appears. If you want to select another Song, use the [+] and [-] buttons. 36 4 48 60 72 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. When using a Style, you can stop recording also by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button then waiting until playback ends. NOTICE • After Recording stops, a “Writing!” message is shown on the display for a while. Never attempt to turn the power off while this is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal memory and result in a loss of data. 5 30 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual To play back the recorded Song, press the [START/STOP] button. Recording Your Performance Recording to a Specified Track 1 2 Make the desired settings, such as those of Voice or Style. If you want to record the melody performance, turn ACMP off (page 17). If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on (page 17). Clearing a User Song 1 Press the [SONG] button then select the desired User Song by using the Number buttons. 2 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. A confirmation message appears. While holding down the [REC] button, press the desired Track button 1 or 2 to engage the Record mode. If you want to record Style playback, make sure to select the Track 2. If you want to record melody performance, select either Track 1 or Track 2 as desired. The illustration below is the example when selecting Track 2. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. 3 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message appears again. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 1 YES 001 Sure? To cancel the operation, press the [-/NO] button. If Track 2 is selected as Recording target for example and Track 1 contains already recorded data, L flashes and R lights in the display. Turning on or off R via the [TRACK 1] button will determine whether you listen to a previously recorded Track or not while recording a new Track. 4 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. A “Writing!” message appears while the track is being cleared. Same as in Steps 3 to 5 (page 30) in “Quick Recording.” Limitations while Recording • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons are not available, or if operated, the new settings cannot be recorded: ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 31 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to nine complete setups can be memorized and assigned to each number button 1–9. Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice and Style. 2 Press and hold down the [REGIST MEMORY] button for longer than a second. “MemNo.?” appears on the display. MemNo.? Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Press the [REGIST MEMORY] button. “LoadNo.?” appears on the display. LoadNo.? 2 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. The recalled REGIST MEMORY number appears in the display for a few seconds. Hold for longer than a second. 3 Press one of the [1]–[9] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, an “Overwr?” message appears in the display. To overwrite, press the [+/YES] button; to cancel, press [-/NO]. REGIST 1 The REGIST MEMORY number can be changed by pressing one of the other [1]–[9] buttons. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. Parameters that can be memorized to Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, ACMP on/off, Split Point, Style volume, Tempo, Main A/B Voice settings Main Voice settings: Voice number and all settings of the related Functions Dual Voice settings: Dual on/off and all settings of the related Functions Split Voice settings: Split on/off and all settings of the related Functions Effect settings: Reverb Type, Reverb level, Chorus Type Harmony settings: Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions Other settings: Sustain on/off, Transpose * Available only when a Style is selected 32 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual The Functions The Functions settings provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button several times until the desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. You can also decrease the Function number by one when you press the [-] button briefly while holding down the [FUNCTION] button. Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. Function name Current value 100 2 StyleVol • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off 001 Function number After a few seconds, the Function name may be replaced with the setting value depending on the selected Function. Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On NOTE • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE], [STYLE] or [GRAND PIANO]. NOTE • The Function number does not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The beat value appears instead. Function List Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. (page 17) 002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song. (page 22) 003 AUX IN Volume AuxInVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the external audio device connected to the instrument’s [AUX IN] jack. (page 25) 004 Transpose Transpos -12–12 005 Tuning Tuning 427.0Hz–453.0Hz 440.0Hz Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. 006 Split Point SplitPnt 036–096 (C1–C6) 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 007 Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard), 4 (Off) 2 (Medium) Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. When 4 (Off) is selected, Touch Response is off and the volume level does not change at all regardless of whether you play the keyboard soft or hard. Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 18). Overall 0 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. Style file 008 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 33 The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Main Voice (page 14) 009 Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice. 010 Octave M.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 011 Chorus Depth M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects a Dual Voice. Dual Voice (page 15) 012 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–550 * 013 Volume D.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 014 Octave D.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 015 Chorus Depth D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Voice (page 15) 016 Split Voice S.Voice 001–550 45 (FngrBass) 017 Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 018 Octave S.Octave -2 – +2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 019 Chorus Depth S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (page 59) 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (page 59) Selects a Split Voice. Effects 020 021 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 022 Chorus Type Chorus 01–05 023 Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 024 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 (Speaker) 2 (Headphone) 3 (Boost) 4 (Piano) 5 (Bright) 6 (Mild) 025 Wide Type Wide 1 (Wide1) 2 (Wide2) 3 (Wide3) OFF 1 (Speaker) 2 (Wide2) Determines whether the Sustain function is on or off. Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. (page 12) Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. (page 15) Harmony (page 16) 026 Harmony Type HarmType 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 59. 027 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the Harmony types 1–5 is selected. PC mode PC mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 35). 029 Local Control Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. 030 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. 031 Initial Send InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. TimeSigN 00–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. Computer (page 35) 028 MIDI Metronome (page 14) 032 34 Time Signature Numerator 033 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note 034 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. The Functions Function Number Function name Display Range/Settings Default Value Descriptions Lesson (page 26) 035 Lesson Track (R) R-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 1 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 036 Lesson Track (L) L-Part GuideTrack1–16, OFF 2 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. 037 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON This parameter is for the Lesson 3 “Waiting.” When set to ON, playback tempo will change for matching the speed you are playing at. When set to OFF, playback tempo will be maintained regardless of the speed you are playing at. Demo (page 22) 038 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 (Demo) 2 (Preset) 3 (User) 4 (Download) 1 (Demo) Determines the repeat playback group. 039 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 (Normal) 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Determines the repeat playback mode. 040 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. OFF, 5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (minutes) 30 minutes Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. 1 (Alkaline) 2 (Ni-MH) 1 (Alkaline) Selects the type of batteries you have installed to this instrument. Alkaline: Alkaline battery/manganese battery Ni-MH: Rechargeable battery Auto Power Off (page 12) 041 Auto Power Off Time AutoOff Battery (page 11) 042 Battery Type Battery * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song or Style. PC Mode (FUNCTION 028) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2* OFF LOCAL Off Off On EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off MIDI TRANSMIT OF SONG ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF STYLE ** No No Yes MIDI TRANSMIT OF KEYBOARD ** No Yes Yes * An expanded version of the PC2 setting is for future use. ** Cannot be set independently. NOTE • MIDI Transmit of Song can be used with User Songs. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 35 Using with a Computer or iPad/iPhone Connecting to a computer This instrument supports MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) and can transmit/receive keyboard performance information (MIDI messages) or Song/ Style data (MIDI files) to/from the computer connected via a USB cable. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to the “Computerrelated Operations” (page 4) on the website. USB terminal Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument (and vice versa). • Song: (.mid) SMF format 0/1 • Style: (.sty) • Backup File: PSR-E343.BUP * * Backup parameters other than “Passing status of Song and Step” can be transferred and saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. NOTE • This instrument can transfer/load up to a maximum of 256 Song files. USB terminal Connecting an iPad/iPhone computer instrument USB cable NOTE • If you transfer the Style file from the computer to this instrument, you need to register it to this instrument for Style playback. By connecting your iPad/iPhone to the instrument, you can take advantage of various functions. To make connections, prepare the optional i-UX1, then refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” (page 4) on the website. Backup and Initialization Backup Parameters The following Backup parameters will be maintained even if the power is turned off. Backup parameters • User Songs (page 30) • Style Number 137 (page 18) • Registration Memory (page 32) • Passing status of Song and Step (page 27) • FUNCTION Settings: (page 33) Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off, Battery Type In addition to the Backup parameters above, all the data (including Style data that have not been loaded) transferred from the connected computer will be maintained even if you turn off the power. Backup Clear This operation initializes the backup parameters. While holding down the highest white key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Flash Clear This operation deletes all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer. Note that Style data registered to Style numbers 137 will be maintained. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. NOTICE Initialization You can initialize your original data via the following two methods. 36 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 4). Troubleshooting Appendix Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with the application on iPhone/iPad. When you use the instrument along with the application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 34 Function 029.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 21), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes—including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06– 26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 34 (Function 030). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 33 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 33 Function 006). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound as you play a chord. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. • • • • The volume is too soft. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The sound quality is poor. ones, or use the optional AC adaptor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play correctly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 12). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (page 35 Function 041). PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 37 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 38 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals  B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note  Whole note rest  Dotted half note  Dotted half note rest  Half note  Half note rest Dotted quarter note  Dotted quarter note rest  Quarter note  Time signature Notes and Rests  Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note  Eighth note rest Sixteenth note  Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 39 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proficiency. From here... 40 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 ...to here Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 41 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three fingers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll find it easier to play if you bend your fingers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 42 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 43 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your fingers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it finishes playing the first phrase. 44 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your fingers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand finger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 45 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The first note has a staccato dot. Spread your fingers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 46 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!”  Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.  Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the first half, if there are places you can’t play with confidence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the finishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 47 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 48 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 118 19 Cool! Organ 0 117 19 Cool! Rotor Organ 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 113 23 Modern Harp 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon Guitar 0 118 30 Dynamic Overdriven 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 116 34 Dynamic Electric Bass 0 112 34 Finger Bass PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 121 40 Funk Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 115 50 Marcato Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 116 66 Sax Ensemble 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 116 62 Octave Brass 0 113 63 80s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 115 63 Funky Brass Voice List Voice No. 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 108 82 RS Tech Saw 0 112 88 Under Heim 0 112 85 Portatone 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 121 82 Funky Lead 0 118 89 Sweet Heaven 0 121 89 Dream Heaven 0 113 89 Symbiont 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad 0 126 90 RS Analog Pad 0 116 91 RS Short Resonance PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani 0 116 117 Tabla WORLD 0 112 106 Banjo 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 117 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 113 108 Gu Zheng 0 120 111 Morin Khuur 0 113 21 Harmonium 1 (Single Reed) 0 114 21 Harmonium 2 (Double Reed) 0 115 21 Harmonium 3 (Triple Reed) 0 114 105 Tanpura 0 0 105 Sitar 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 97 16 Santur 0 0 112 Shanai 0 98 106 Oud 0 97 108 Kanoon 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 0 108 Koto Voice No. 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) DUAL* – – – Octave Piano – – – Piano & Strings – – – Piano Pad – – – Octave Harpsichord – – – Tiny Electric Piano – – – E.P. Pad – – – Full Organ – – – Octave Jazz Guitar – – – Octave Strings – – – Orchestra Section – – – Octave Pizzicato Strings – – – Strings Session – – – Brass Tutti – – – Orchestra Tutti – – – Octave French Horns – – – Octave Harp – – – Orchestra Hit & Timpani – – – Octave Choir – – – Jazz Brass Section – – – Jazz Section – – – Ballroom Sax Ensemble – – – Ballroom Brass – – – Flute & Clarinet – – – Trumpet & Trombone – – – Fat Synth Brass – – – Octave Lead – – – Super 5th Lead SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. 126 0 40 Indian Kit 1 126 0 115 Indian Kit 2 126 0 37 Arabic Kit 126 0 41 Cuban Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 49 Voice List XGlite Voice List Voice No. 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 50 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG Piano 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 25 25 Nylon Guitar 3 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm 0 45 33 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark 0 40 34 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass Voice List Voice No. 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 0 48 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 64 51 Synth Strings 4 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe Voice No. 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 24 82 Heavy Synth 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 64 97 Harmo Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 51 Voice List Voice No. 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 52 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 65 103 Big Pan 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 40 47 Yang Chin 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 96 106 Rabab 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 96 108 Taisho-kin XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 188 127/000/001 189 127/000/002 190 127/000/009 191 127/000/017 192 127/000/025 193 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 53 Drum Kit List C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 54 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 26 D 0 14 D -1 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 41 F 1 29 F 0 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 84 C 5 72 C 4 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 93 A 5 81 A 4 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 188 127/000/001 194 127/000/113 195 127/000/033 196 127/000/041 197 127/000/049 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 198 126/000/128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L Bass Drum L BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Analog Cowbell Hand Cym. H Hand Cym.Short H Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Drum Kit List * Actual keyboard notes of the SFX Kit 1 and 2 are one octave lower than the ones described in the list below. 199 126/000/040 200 126/000/0115 Indian Kit 1 Indian Kit 2 Hateli Long Hateli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Tabla tun Tablabaya dhin Tabla di Tablabaya dhe Tabla ti Tabla ne Tabla taran Tabla tak Chipri Kanjira Open Kanjira Slap Kanjira Mute Kanjira Bend up Kanjira Bend down Dholak Open Dholak Mute Dholak Slap Dhol Open Dhol Mute Dhol Slap Dhol Slide Mridangam Normal Mridangam Open Mridangam Mute Mridangam Slap Mridangam Rim Chimta Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Open Dholki Mute Dholki Slap Dholki Slide Dholki Rim Khol Open Khol Slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Mridang Open Mridang Mute Mridang Rim Mridang Slide Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh Mltatk Madal-A2 Madal-A#2 Madal-B2 Madal-C3 Madal-C#3 Madal-D3 Madal-D#3 Madal-E3 Madal-F3 Madal-F#3 Madal-G3 Indian Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Indian Bhangra Scat 3 indian Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap 201 126/000/037 202 126/000/041 203 126/000/001 204 126/000/002 205 126/000/113 Arabic Kit Cuban Kit SFX Kit 1 * SFX Kit 2 * Sound Effect Kit Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Drum Loop Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Paila L Timbale H Open Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 55 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Song No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song Name Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ 56 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Style List Style No. Style Name Style No. Style Name Style No. SaturdayNight 93 DiscoHands 94 Style Name 8BEAT 47 1 BritPopRock 48 2 8BeatModern 3 Cool8Beat 49 BigBandFast 95 4 60sGtrPop 50 BigBandBallad 96 6/8March 5 8BeatAdria 51 AcousticJazz 97 GermanMarch 6 60s8Beat 52 AcidJazz 98 PolkaPop 7 8Beat 53 JazzClub 99 OberPolka 8 OffBeat 54 Swing1 100 Tarantella 9 60sRock 55 Swing2 101 Showtune 10 HardRock 56 Five/Four 102 ChristmasSwing 11 RockShuffle 57 Dixieland 103 ChristmasWaltz 12 8BeatRock 58 Ragtime 104 ScottishReel SWING&JAZZ 16BEAT Rumba Jive TRAD&WORLD USMarch 105 Duranguense BluesRock 106 CumbiaGrupera R&B 13 16Beat 59 14 PopShuffle 60 Soul 107 Yi Zu Min Ge 15 GuitarPop 61 DetroitPop 108 Jing Ju Jie Zou 16 16BtUptempo 62 60sRock&Roll 109 Bhajan 17 KoolShuffle 63 6/8Soul 110 BollyMix 18 HipHopLight 64 CrocoTwist 111 IndianPop BALLAD 65 Rock&Roll 112 Bhangra 19 70sGlamPiano 66 ComboBoogie 113 Dandiya 20 PianoBallad 67 6/8Blues 114 ModernDangdut 21 LoveSong COUNTRY 115 Keroncong 22 6/8ModernEP 68 CountryPop 116 Saeidy 23 6/8SlowRock 69 CountrySwing 117 WehdaSaghira 24 OrganBallad 70 Country2/4 118 Iranian Elec 25 PopBallad 71 Bluegrass 119 Emarati 26 16BeatBallad DANCE LATIN WALTZ 72 BrazilianSamba 120 SwingWaltz 27 ClubBeat 73 BossaNova 121 JazzWaltz 28 Electronica 74 Forro 122 CountryWaltz 29 FunkyHouse 75 Sertanejo 123 OberWalzer 30 MellowHipHop 76 Tijuana 124 Musette 31 Chillout 77 Joropo 32 EuroTrance 78 Parranda 125 Learning2/4 33 Ibiza 79 Reggaeton 126 Learning4/4 34 SwingHouse 80 Mambo 127 Learning6/8 35 Clubdance 81 Salsa 36 ClubLatin 82 Beguine 128 Stride 37 Garage1 83 Reggae 129 PianoSwing 38 Garage2 BALLROOM 130 PianoBoogie 39 TechnoParty 84 VienneseWaltz 131 Arpeggio 40 UKPop 85 EnglishWaltz 132 Habanera 41 HipHopGroove 86 Slowfox 133 SlowRock 42 HipShuffle 87 Foxtrot 134 8BeatPianoBallad 43 HipHopPop 88 Quickstep 135 6/8PianoMarch DISCO 89 Tango 136 PianoWaltz 44 ModernDisco 90 Pasodoble 45 70sDisco 91 Samba 46 LatinDisco 92 ChaChaCha CHILDREN PIANIST PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 57 Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB Name MDB No. MDB Name 48 HighMoon 96 Showbiz 1 AlvFever 49 InMood 97 StarMrch 2 DayPdise 50 MistySax 98 WashPost 3 GoMyWay 51 MoonLit 99 XmasWalz 4 HowDeep! 52 New York 100 YankDood 5 HurryLuv 53 SaintMch 6 Imagine 54 ShearJz 7 JustCall 55 TstHoney 8 SultanSw 56 9 WhitePle 10 YesterPf USPatrol EASY LISTENING 57 Close2U ROCK 58 Entrtain 11 JumpRock 59 LuvStory 12 PickUpPc 60 MyPrince 13 RdRiverR 61 PupetStr 14 SatsfyGt 62 Raindrop 15 Sheriff 63 R'ticGtr 16 SmokeWtr 64 SingRain 17 TwistAgn 65 SmallWld 18 VenusPop 66 SpkSoft DANCE 67 StrangeN TimeGoes 19 2 of Us 68 20 B Leave 69 WhteXmas 21 Back St 70 WishStar 22 Crockett 71 WondrWld 23 FunkyTwn 24 KillSoft 72 BambaLa 25 Nine PM 73 BeHappy! 26 SingBack 74 CopaLola 27 StrandD 75 DayNight 76 Ipanema 28 AdelineB 77 MuchoTrp 29 CatMemry 78 Sunshine 30 ElvGhett 79 Tico Org 31 Feeling 80 TrbWave 32 Mn Rivr 33 OnMyMnd 81 BoxerFlt 34 OverRbow 82 CntryRds 35 ReleseMe 83 Jambala 36 SavingLv 84 TopWorld 37 SmokyEye 85 YlwRose 38 WhisprSx 86 BrazilBr BALLAD R&B LATIN COUNTRY BALLROOM 39 AmazingG 87 CherryTp 40 BoogiePf 88 DanubeWv 41 Clock Rk 89 TangoAc 42 CU later 90 43 HappyDay Tea4Two TRADITIONAL 44 RisingSn 91 CampRace 45 ShookUp 92 CielPari 46 TeddyBer 93 GrndClok 94 JinglBel 95 MickMrch SWING & JAZZ 47 58 MDB No. POP ChooChoo PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 01 Harmony Type Duet 02 Trio 03 Block Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Reverb Types No. 01–03 Reverb Type Description Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. 05 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 59 Specifications Size/Weight Keyboard Display Voices Effects Accompaniment Styles Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Display Backlight Language Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) Preset Number of Voices Compatibility Reverb Chorus Ultra-Wide Stereo Types Master EQ Harmony Melody Suppressor Dual Functions Split Panel Sustain Number of Preset Styles Fingering Preset Style Control External Styles Other Features Preset Recording/Playback Recording Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Compatible Data Format Playback Recording Lesson/Guide Registration Function Overall Miscellaneous Memory Memory/ Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Connectivity Number of Buttons Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Portable Grand Button Internal Memory USB TO HOST DC IN Headphones/Output Sustain Pedal AUX IN (Stereo-mini) Amplifiers Speakers Adaptor Power Supply Power Supply Batteries Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories Accessories Optional Accessories 945mm x 369mm x 122mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 4-13/16”) 4.4kg (not including batteries) (9lbs., 11oz.) 61 Yes LCD display Yes English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 187 panel Voices + 18 drum/SFX kits + 345 XGlite Voices GM/XGlite 9 types 4 types 3 types 6 types 26 types Yes Yes Yes Yes 136 Multi finger ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes 100 Yes 102 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded) SMF Formats 0 & 1 Original File Format [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING], [PHRASE REPEAT], [A-B REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY] 9 Yes 11–280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 427.0–440.0–453.0 Hz (approx. 0.2Hz increments) Yes Approx. 1.7MB Yes DC IN 12V [PHONES/OUTPUT] x 1 [SUSTAIN] x 1 Yes 2.5W+2.5W 12cm×2 Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent Six “AA” size alkaline (LR6), manganese (R6) or Ni-MH rechargeable batteries 8W (When using PA-130 power adaptor) Yes • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual • AC Power adaptor * (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) • Online Member Product Registration * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • AC Power Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Keyboard Stand: L-2C • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • USB MIDI Interface for iPhone/iPod touch/iPad (i-UX1) * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 60 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual Index A H A-B Repeat ................................... 24 AC Power Adaptor ...................... 10 ACMP ........................................... 17 audio device ................................. 25 Auto Accompaniment ................. 17 AUTO FILL ................................. 19 Auto Power Off ...................... 12, 35 AUX IN .................................... 9, 25 AUX IN Volume .......................... 33 Harmony .......................................16 Harmony Type ........................16, 34 Harmony Volume ...................16, 34 Headphone ....................................11 Reverb .......................................... 16 Reverb Level ................................ 34 Reverb Type ........................... 34, 59 rhythm .......................................... 17 rit. .................................................. 19 I S Initial Send ...................................34 Initialization .................................36 INTRO ..........................................19 iPad ................................................36 iPhone ...........................................36 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ..4 i-UX1 ............................................36 Section .......................................... 19 Song .............................................. 22 Song Book ............................... 4, 26 Song Book Sample ...................... 38 Song Category ............................. 22 Song List ...................................... 56 Song Volume .......................... 22, 33 Specifications ............................... 60 Split .............................................. 15 Split Point ........................ 15, 17, 33 Split Voice .............................. 15, 34 Style .............................................. 17 STYLE FILE ................................. 4 Style List ...................................... 57 Style Register ............................... 33 Style Volume .......................... 17, 33 Sustain .................................... 16, 34 Synchro Start ............................... 17 B Backup .......................................... 36 Backup Clear ............................... 36 Backup Parameter ........................ 36 battery ........................................... 10 Battery Type ................................. 35 Beat ............................................... 13 BGM ............................................. 23 C Chord ............................................ 13 Chord Dictionary ......................... 21 Chord Type ................................... 20 Chorus .......................................... 16 Chorus Type ........................... 34, 59 computer ....................................... 36 Computer-related Operations ....... 4 D Demo ............................................ 22 Demo Group ................................ 35 Demo Play Mode ......................... 35 Display ......................................... 13 Drum Kit List ............................... 53 Dual Voice .............................. 15, 34 E Effect ...................................... 16, 34 Effect Type List ........................... 59 ENDING ...................................... 19 EQ Setting .................................... 12 EQ type ......................................... 12 External Clock ............................. 34 F Fast Forward ................................ 23 Fast Reverse ................................. 23 Flash Clear ................................... 36 Footswitch .................................... 11 Function ........................................ 33 Function List ................................ 33 G GM System Level 1 ....................... 4 Grade ............................................ 28 Grand Piano ................................. 14 K Keyboard Display ........................13 Keys To Success ...........................26 L Lesson ...........................................26 Listening .................................26, 28 Local Control ...............................34 M MAIN ............................................19 Main Voice .............................14, 34 Master EQ Type ...........................34 MASTER VOLUME ...................11 Measure ........................................13 Melody Suppressor ......................25 Metronome ...................................14 Metronome Volume ...............14, 34 MIDI Basics ...................................4 MIDI Reference .............................4 Music Database ............................18 Music Database List ....................58 Music Rest ................................4, 11 Musicsoft Downloader ................18 N Notation ........................................13 O T Tap ................................................ 19 Tempo ..................................... 14, 19 Time Signature ...................... 14, 34 Timing .................................... 26, 28 Touch Response ............................. 4 Touch Sensitivity ................... 12, 33 Track ............................................. 30 Transpose ..................................... 33 Troubleshooting ........................... 37 Tuning .......................................... 33 U Ultra-Wide Stereo ....................... 15 USB ................................................ 4 USB TO HOST ............................. 9 User Song ..................................... 30 One Touch Setting .......................14 V P Voice ............................................. 14 Voice List ..................................... 48 Part ................................................24 Passing Status ...............................27 Pause .............................................23 PC Mode .................................34, 35 Phrase Repeat .........................26, 29 Power Requirements ....................10 R Random .........................................23 Recording .....................................30 Recording Data Capacity ............30 Registration Memory ...................32 W Waiting ................................... 26, 28 Wide Type .................................... 34 X XGlite ............................................. 4 Y Your Tempo ................................. 35 PSR-E343/YPT-340 Owner’s Manual 61 (US only) LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2012 Yamaha Corporation of America. 62 63 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor autorizado relacionado a seguir. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha De México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 “Prisma Insurgentes”, Col. San José Insurgentes, Del. Benito Juárez, 03900, México, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 044-387-8080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria (Central Eastern Europe Office) Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Poland Office ul. Wrotkowa 14 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: 02-978-20-25 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG ASIA Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 INDIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 INDONESIA SPAIN/PORTUGAL GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland – filial Denmark Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. The Emporium, Level 3, St. Louis Street Msida MSD06 Tel: 02133-2144 Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. Spazedge building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector 47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-485-3300 PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) PRIVATE LIMITED Blk 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 DMI6 Yamaha Global Site Yamaha Downloads http://www.yamaha.com/ http://download.yamaha.com/ ZE42920 C.S,G., DMI Development Division © 2012-2014 Yamaha Corporation Published 04/2014 PO##*.*-**B0 Printed in China
1 / 1

Yamaha 340 de handleiding

Categorie
Digitale piano's
Type
de handleiding